You are on page 1of 348

J54L_8R34_EE_02H.

BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

A Word to Mazda Owners

Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete
customer satisfaction in mind.

To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual
carefully and follow its recommendations.

An Authorised Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is
necessary, that's the place to go.

Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best
possible service.

We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.

Mazda Motor Corporation


HIROSHIMA, JAPAN

Important Notes About This Manual


Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of
your Mazda. Should you resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.

All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because
improvement is a constant goal at Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in
specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.

Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a
result, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

©2002 Mazda Motor Corporation


Printed in Japan Aug. 2002(Print1)

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

How to Use This Manual

We want to help you get the most driving Index: A good place to start is the Index,
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's an alphabetical listing of all information
manual, when read from cover to cover, in your manual.
can do that in many ways.
You’ll find several WARNINGs,
Illustrations complement the words of the CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
Mazda. By reading your manual, you can
find out about the features, important WARNING
safety information, and driving under
various road conditions. A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which bodily injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
The above symbol in this manual means caution is ignored.
“Do not do this ” or “Do not let this
happen”.
NOTE
References to left hand and right hand are A NOTE provides information and
made as if facing in the same direction the sometimes suggests how to make
vehicle faces. Although this manual better use of your vehicle.
explains a left-hand-drive model, it also
applies to right-hand-drive models.

The above symbol, located on some parts


of the vehicle, indicates that this manual
contains information related to the part.
Please refer to the manual for a detailed
explanation.

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Table of Contents

Your Mazda at a Glance 1


Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.

Essential Safety Equipment 2


Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, SRS air bags and
child-restraint systems.
Knowing Your Mazda 3
Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment
of various parts.
Before Driving Your Mazda 4
Important information about driving your Mazda.

Driving Your Mazda 5


Explanation of instruments and controls.

Interior Comfort 6
Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
In Case of an Emergency 7
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.

Maintenance and Care 8


How to keep your Mazda in top condition.

Customer Information 9
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.

Specifications 10
Technical information about your Mazda.

Index 11

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM
J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

1 Your Vehicle at a Glance

Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.

Instrument Panel Overview ....................................................... 1- 2

Interior Overview ........................................................................ 1- 3

Exterior Overview ....................................................................... 1- 4

1-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Instrument Panel Overview

Driver-side air bag Wiper and washer lever


(page 2-66) (page 5-41)
Instrument cluster Hazard warning flasher switch
(page 5-20) (page 5-45)
Lighting control/Direction indicators Audio system
(page 5-38) (page 6-16)
Fog lights switch Passenger-side air bag
(page 5-40) (page 2-66)
Power window switches Shift lever
(page 3-12) (page 5-11)
Glove box
(page 6-59)
Parking brake
(page 5-6)

Power window lock switch


(page 3-15)
Bonnet release handle Lighter
(page 3-16) (page 6-55)
Tilt wheel release lever Cup holder
(page 3-26) (page 6-57)
Ignition switch Air-conditioning system
(page 5-2) (page 6-2)
Ashtray
(page 6-56)

1-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Interior Overview

Sunvisors Map light


(page 6-52) (page 6-53)
Seat belts Rearview mirror
(page 2-36) (page 3-29)
Interior light Vanity mirror
(page 6-52) (page 6-52)

Third-row seat Front seats


(page 2-28) (page 2-2)
Rear seat/Second-row seat Side air bags
(page 2-19) (page 2-66)

1-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Exterior Overview

Brake lights/Tail lights Child safety locks


(page 8-41) (page 3-9)
Rear window defroster Outside mirrors
(page 5-43) (page 3-26)
Rear windscreen
wiper blades
(page 8-29)

Liftgate
(page 3-9)
License plate
lights
(page 8-41)

Tyres
(page 8-32)
Rear direction indicator lights
(page 8-41)
Reverse lights
(page 8-41)
Sunroof Aerial
(page 3-17) (page 6-16)
Windscreen wiper blades
(page 8-27)
Washer fluid Fuel-filler flap
(page 8-23) (page 3-15)
Bonnet
(page 3-16)

Front fog lights


(page 8-39) Doors and keys
(page 3-2)
Side-direction indicator lights
(page 8-39)
Parking lights
(page 8-39)
Front direction indicator lights Headlights
(page 8-39) (page 8-37)

1-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

2 Essential Safety Equipment

Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, SRS air bags and
child-restraint systems.

Seats .............................................................................................. 2- 2
Front Seats ............................................................................... 2- 2
Rear Seats (5-Passenger Model) .............................................. 2- 9
Second-Row Seats (7-Passenger Model) ................................. 2-19
Third-Row Seat (7-Passenger Model) ..................................... 2-28
Flat Folding (7-Passenger Model) ........................................... 2-35

Seat Belt Systems ......................................................................... 2-36


Seat Belt Precautions ............................................................... 2-36
3-Point Type Seat Belt ............................................................. 2-40
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems ...... 2-42
Rear Centre Position Seat Belt (5-Passenger Model) .............. 2-44
2-Point Type Seat Belt (7-Passenger Model) .......................... 2-47
Seat Belt Warning Light (Except European Model) ................ 2-48

Child Restraint ............................................................................ 2-49


Child Restraint Precautions ..................................................... 2-49
Categories of Child-Restraint Systems (Europe) .................... 2-52
Child-Restraint System Installation Position (Europe) ........... 2-53
Child-Restraint System Suitability for Various Seat Positions
Table (Europe) ......................................................................... 2-58
Installing Child-Restraint Systems .......................................... 2-59
Air Bag Cut-Off System .......................................................... 2-62
ISOFIX Bar-Secured Child-Restraint Systems ....................... 2-62

SRS Air Bags ............................................................................... 2-66


Supplementary Restraint Systems (SRS) Precautions ............. 2-66
Air Bag System Description .................................................... 2-70

2-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

To move a seat forward or backward, raise


Front Seats the lever and slide the seat to the desired
position and release the lever.

WARNING
Securing the Seats:
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that
are not securely locked are
dangerous. In a sudden stop or Lever
collision, the seat or seatback could
move, causing injury. Make sure the
adjustable components of the seat are
locked in place by attempting to slide
the seat forward and backward and
rocking the seatback.
Make sure the lever returns to its original
position and the seat is locked in place by
▼ Seat Slide attempting to push it forward and
backward.
WARNING
Driver’s Seat Adjustment:
Adjusting the driver’s seat while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous. The
driver could lose control of the vehicle
and have an accident. Adjust the
driver’s seat only when the vehicle is
stopped.

2-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

▼ Seat Recline (Type A)


To change the seatback angle, lean
forward slightly while rotating the dial.
WARNING Then lean back to the desired position.

Reclining:
Sitting in a reclined position while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous
because you don’t get the full
protection from seat belts. During
sudden braking or a collision, you
can slide under the lap belt and suffer
serious internal injuries. For
maximum protection, sit well back
and upright.
Dial
Unlocked Seatback:
A seatback plays an important role in (Type B)
your protection in a vehicle. Leaving To change the seatback angle, lean
the seatback unlocked is dangerous as forward slightly while raising the lever.
it can allow passengers to be ejected Then lean back to the desired position and
or thrown around and baggage to release the lever.
strike occupants in a sudden stop or
collision, resulting in severe injury.
After adjusting the seatback at any
time, even when there are no other
passengers, rock the seatback to make
sure it is locked in place.

Lever

2-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

Make sure the lever returns to its original ▼ Head Restraint


position and the seatback is locked in
place by attempting to push it forward and
backward. WARNING
Head Restraints Adjustment:
CAUTION Driving with the head restraints
When returning a rear-reclined adjusted too low or removed is
seatback to its upright position, make dangerous. With no support behind
sure you support the seatback while your head, your neck could be
operating the seatback lever. If the seriously injured in a collision.
seatback is not supported, it will flip Always drive with the head restraints
forward suddenly and could cause inserted when seats are being used
injury. and make sure they are properly
adjusted.
▼ Seat Tilt (Driver’s Seat)
Height adjustment
The seat-bottom angle can be adjusted by
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
rotating the dial.
desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stop-
catch release, then push the head restraint
down.

Stop-catch release
Up

Down
Dial

Adjust the head restraint so that the top is


parallel with the top of the passenger’s
ears, never the passenger’s neck.

2-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

Removal ▼ Folding the Passenger’s Seat


To remove the head restraint, press the The passenger’s seatback can be folded
stop-catch release, then pull up on the down and used as a table while the vehicle
head restraint. is not moving.
Stop-catch release The front and rear passenger’s seatbacks
can be folded down for placement of long
objects. Make sure the object is secure.

WARNING
Using Folded Seatback as a Table
While the Vehicle is Moving:
Using the folded seatback as a table
while driving is dangerous. During
sudden braking or a collision, objects
placed on the folded seatback could
become projectiles that could hit and
injure someone. Never use the folded
seat as a table while the vehicle is
moving.

Unsecured Objects:
Not securing objects placed on the
folded seatback is dangerous. During
sudden braking or a collision, the
objects could hit passengers and
cause serious injuries, or the objects
could hit the shift lever, forcing you to
lose control of the vehicle. When
placing objects on the folded
seatback, always make sure they are
secure.

2-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

1. Tuck the seat belt buckle all the way


WARNING down.

Passenger on the Folded Seatback: Buckle


Driving with a passenger on the
folded seatback is dangerous.
Allowing a child to sit up on the
folded seatback while the vehicle is
moving is particularly dangerous. In
a sudden stop or even a minor
collision, a child not in a proper seat
or child-restraint system and seat belt
could be thrown forward, back or
even out of the car resulting in
serious injuries or death. The child or
2. Raise the reclining lever or pull the
other objects in the baggage area
lean forward lever. Make sure the
could be thrown into other occupants
seatback is at its maximum forward
and cause serious injury. Never allow
reclined position.
a passenger to sit or stand on the
folded seatback while the vehicle is
moving.

To fold the seatback

CAUTION Lever

Folding the seatback without tucking


the seat belt buckle down could
damage the seatback.

Lean forward lever

2-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

3. Push the fold-down lever forward and ▼ Pull-up Seatback Trays


push the seatback all the way down.
Make sure the seatback is locked.
WARNING
Using Seatback Trays While Vehicle
is Moving
Using the seatback trays while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous.
During sudden braking or a collision,
rear seat passengers could be thrown
forward into a tray causing serious
injury. Objects placed on a seatback
tray could become projectiles that
Fold-down lever could hit and injure someone. Always
collapse and secure the trays before
To return the seatback to the upright driving the vehicle.
position
1. Push the fold-down lever down to Pull-up trays are available in the seatbacks
unlock the seat. of the front seats and can be used when
the vehicle is parked.
2. Push the seatback to the upright Grasp the front, central part of the tray
position. Make sure the seatback is when setting up or collapsing it.
locked.

2-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

CAUTION WARNING
• Do not place heavy objects on a
Positioning the Shoulder Belt Over
seatback tray. Heavy objects could
the Armrest:
cause the tray to collapse and injure
Positioning the shoulder portion of a
someone.
front seat belt over the armrest is
• Do not recline the front seats when dangerous as it cannot provide
the seatback trays are in use. Hot adequate protection in a collision and
liquids may cause scalding if could result in serious injuries. Never
spilled, or objects could fall causing position the shoulder portion of a
injury. front seat belt over the armrest.

▼ Armrest
The armrest can be used or placed
upright.

2-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 9 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

▼ Seat Warmer
Rear Seats
The front seats are electrically heated. The (5-Passenger Model)
ignition switch must be in the ON
position.

Press the switch to turn the seat warmer WARNING


on or off. When the switch is in the ON
position, the indicator light will come on. Stacking Cargo:
Stacking luggage or other cargo
ON
higher than the seatbacks, and
putting things on the rear package
OFF tray is dangerous. During sudden
braking or a collision, objects can
become projectiles that may hit and
injure passengers. Don’t stack things
higher than the seatbacks or put
things on the rear package tray.

Securing Seats:
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that
are not securely locked are
dangerous. In a sudden stop or
NOTE collision, the seat or seatback could
The thermostat regulates seat move, causing injury. Make sure the
temperature by turning the current on adjustable components of the seat are
and off. locked in place by attempting to slide
the seat forward and backward and
rocking the seatback.

Seat Adjustment:
Adjusting the seat while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Sudden braking
or a collision could cause serious
injury. Adjust the seat only when the
vehicle is stopped.

2-9

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 10 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

WARNING WARNING
Unlocked Seatback: Children and the Folding Rear Seats:
A seatback plays an important role in Playing with the folding rear seats is
your protection in a vehicle. Leaving dangerous. The folding rear
the seatback unlocked is dangerous as seatbacks cannot be folded down from
it can allow passengers to be ejected inside the luggage compartment. Do
or thrown around and baggage to not give the car keys to children and
strike occupants in a sudden stop or do not allow them to play in the
collision, resulting in severe injury. vehicle.
After adjusting the seatback at any
time, even when there are no other
passengers, rock the seatback to make NOTE
sure it is locked in place.
When returning a rear seat to its
original position, also replace the seat
Passenger on the Folded Seatback:
belt to its normal position. Verify that
Driving with a passenger on the
the seat belt pulls and retracts.
folded seatback is dangerous.
Allowing a child to sit up on the
folded seatback while the vehicle is ▼ Seat Recline
moving is particularly dangerous. In
a sudden stop or even a minor
collision, a child not in a proper seat
WARNING
or child-restraint system and seat belt
Reclining:
could be thrown forward, back or
Sitting in a reclined position while the
even out of the car resulting in
vehicle is moving is dangerous
serious injuries or death. The child or
because you don’t get the full
other objects in the baggage area
protection from seat belts. During
could be thrown into other occupants
sudden braking or a collision, you
and cause serious injury. Never allow
can slide under the lap belt and suffer
a passenger to sit or stand on the
serious internal injuries. For
folded seatback while the vehicle is
maximum protection, sit well back
moving.
and upright.

2-10

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 11 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

To change the seatback angle, lean ▼ Head Restraint


forward slightly while pulling the strap.
Then lean back to the desired position and
release the strap. Make sure the seat is WARNING
securely latched.
Head Restraints Adjustment:
Driving with the head restraints
adjusted too low or removed is
dangerous. With no support behind
your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
Strap
Always drive with the head restraints
inserted when seats are being used
and make sure they are properly
adjusted.

Height adjustment
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
CAUTION desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stop-
• When returning a rear-reclined catch release, then push the head restraint
seatback to its upright position, down.
make sure you support the seatback
while operating the strap. If the Stop-catch release
seatback is not supported, it will flip
forward suddenly and could cause
injury.
• Reclining the rear seat when the
luggage compartment cover is in the
first position could damage the seat
and cover. Remove the cover or
move it to the second position.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top is


parallel with the top of the passenger’s
ears, never the passenger’s neck.

2-11

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 12 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

Removal The centre-rear seatback can be folded


down and used as a table while the vehicle
To remove the head restraint, press the
is not moving.
stop-catch release, then pull up on the
head restraint.

Stop-catch release

▼ Folding the Centre-Rear Seat


CAUTION
Don’t sit or lie on the folded seatback.
The seat could be damaged.
WARNING
To fold the centre-rear seatback
Using Folded Seatback as a Table
While the Vehicle is Moving: 1. Unfasten the lap portion of the centre-
Using the folded seatback as a table rear seat belt (page 2-46).
while driving is dangerous. During a 2. Secure the centre-rear seat belt in the
sudden stop or collision, objects seat belt retainer (page 2-46).
placed on the folded seatback could
become projectiles that could hit and 3. Tuck the rear seat’s seat belt buckle
injure someone. Never use the folded down.
seat as a table while the vehicle is
moving.

2-12

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 13 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

2. Fasten the lap portion of the centre-rear


CAUTION seat belt before a passenger sits in the
seat (page 2-44).
Lowering the seatback without tucking
the seat belt buckle down could NOTE
damage the seatback.
Make sure the centre-rear seat belt is
4. Pull the strap of the centre-rear seat and routed between the centre-rear and the
lower the seatback forward. Make sure left-rear seat.
the seatback is locked.
▼ Folding and Stowing Rear Seats
All the rear seats can be flipped and
stowed forward to provide more cargo
space.
To fold and stow a rear seat
Strap 1. Unfasten the lap portion of the centre-
rear seat belt (page 2-46).
2. Secure the centre-rear seat belt in the
seat belt retainer (page 2-46).
3. Remove the head restraint (page 2-11).
To return the seatback to the upright
4. Tuck the rear seat's seat belt buckles
position
down.
1. Pull the strap of the centre-rear seat and
lift the seatback upright. Attempt to
move the seatback forward and
backward to make sure it is locked.

Strap

2-13

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 14 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

5. Pull the strap and lower the seatback 8. To prevent the rear seats from falling
forward. Make sure the seatback is back down, thread the holding strap for
locked. each seat around one of the front head
restraint uprights and fasten with the
buckles.
Strap

6. Work only on one seat at a time to


avoid one seat falling while working on
another.
7. Pull the strap and raise the entire seat WARNING
up and forward.
Loose Seat:
A seat not secured with a holding
Strap strap is dangerous. The seat could fall
down and cause serious injury.
Ensure that each stowed seat is
secured with a holding strap.

9. Adjust the holding straps to tighten


them securely on the head restraint
uprights.

NOTE
When stowing the left-rear or centre-
rear seats, fasten the holding straps on
the head-restraint upright of the left-
front seat.
For the right-rear seat, fasten the
holding strap on the head restraint
upright of the right-front seat.

2-14

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 15 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

10.Insert the head restraints into the 3. Tuck the holding strap in the pocket.
alternate storage holes at the top of the
uprighted seat bottom.
Pocket

4. Carefully lower the seat backward until


it locks in place. Attempt to lift the seat
To return a rear seat to its original up to make sure it is firmly locked
position down.
1. Remove the head restraint from the
back of the uprighted seat bottom.
2. Support the seat while unfastening the
holding strap from the head restraint
upright so that the seat doesn’t fall
down.

2-15

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 16 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

5. Pull the strap and raise the seatback to ▼ Removal of Rear Seats
the upright position. Make sure the
seatback is locked. All the rear seats can be removed to
provide more cargo space.

Strap
WARNING
Seat Removal or Installation While
Vehicle is Moving or on a Slope:
Removing or installing the rear seats
while the vehicle is moving or on a
slope is dangerous. The seats are
heavier than they appear and could
suddenly detach causing serious
injury. Remove or install the seats
6. Reinsert the head restraint to its normal with the vehicle parked on a level
position. surface.

7. Fasten the lap portion of the centre-rear Riding on The Floor Space:
seat belt before a passenger sits in the Riding on the floor space created by
seat (page 2-44). the removal of the rear seats is
dangerous. Sudden braking or a
NOTE collision could cause serious injury.
Do not sit or lie in the floor space for
Make sure the centre-rear seat belt is the rear seats while the vehicle is
routed between the centre-rear and moving. Never ride in a vehicle where
left-rear seats. you can’t sit in the seat and wear the
seat belt.

Pinching Fingers or Hands:


Placing your hands around the seat
anchors when removing or installing
the rear seats is dangerous. You could
pinch your hands or fingers between
the seat anchor and the seat. Hold the
edge of the seat when lowering it into
place. Never place your hands
between the seat anchor and the seat.

2-16

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 17 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

3. Press down each seat lock lever.


WARNING 4. Remove the seat by tilting it backward
to free it from the floor anchors.
Unsecured Seats:
Driving with the seat unsecured is Seat
dangerous. The seat may become lock
detached while the vehicle is moving lever
causing serious injury. After
installing the seat, attempt to push it
forward and backward to make sure it
is securely locked.

To remove a rear seat


1. Remove one seat at a time following
procedure 1 through 7 of "To fold and
stow a rear seat" (page 2-13). To install a rear seat
2. While supporting the seat, insert the 1. If the head restraint is inserted in the
head restraint into the alternate storage seat bottom, pull the head restraint and
holes at the top of the uprighted seat remove it.
bottom.
2. Align the seat retaining clamps with
the front floor anchors.

Front floor
anchor

Seat retaining
clamp

2-17

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 18 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

3. Supporting the seat with your hand, If you plan on carrying only four people
raise the seat lock levers on the left and and will not need the fifth seat during a
right to lock it in place. trip, your Mazda design allows you to give
the rear seat passengers a roomier feeling
Seat by taking out the centre-rear seat and
lock moving the remaining two seats inboard
lever for a four passenger vehicle. Make sure
the seat belt buckles point inboard for the
seats to be properly located.

1. Remove all the rear seats (page 2-16).

Right-rear seat

4. Return the rear seat to its original


position following procedure 4 through
7 of “To return a rear seat to its original
position”
▼ Four-Passenger Seating
Arrangement Left-rear seat

2. Align the seat retaining clamps of the


WARNING outside seats with the front floor
anchors. Align the left-rear seat with
Rear-Passenger Seating and Seat the second (2) and fourth (4) positions.
Belts: Align the right-rear seat with the fifth
Using the centre-rear seat belt while (5) and seventh (7) positions.
seated in the left-rear or right-rear 3. Install the left-rear seat and right-rear
seat is dangerous. In a collision or seats following procedures 1 through 6
sudden stop, the centre-rear seat belt of "To install a rear seat" (page 2-17).
cannot provide protection for a
passenger in the left-rear or right- Right-rear seat
rear seat. When the centre-rear seat is
not in use, stow its seat belt in the
retainer and use the appropriate left- Left-rear seat
rear or right-rear seat belt. Front floor
anchor

Seat retaining
(7)
clamp
(5) (6)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)

2-18

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 19 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

Second-Row Seats WARNING


(7-Passenger Model)
Unlocked Seatback:
A seatback plays an important role in
WARNING your protection in a vehicle. Leaving
the seatback unlocked is dangerous as
Stacking Cargo: it can allow passengers to be ejected
Stacking luggage or other cargo or thrown around and baggage to
higher than the seatback is strike occupants in a sudden stop or
dangerous. During a sudden stop or collision, resulting in severe injury.
collision, objects can become After adjusting the seatback at any
projectiles that could hit and injure time, even when there are no other
passengers. Don't stack things higher passengers, rock the seatback to make
than the seatback. sure it is locked in place.

Securing Seats: Passenger on the Folded Seatback:


Adjustable seats and seatbacks that Driving with a passenger on the
are not securely latched are folded seatback is dangerous.
dangerous. In a sudden stop or Allowing a child to sit up on the
collision, the seat or seatback could folded seatback while the vehicle is
move, causing injury. Make sure the moving is particularly dangerous.
adjustable components of the seat are During sudden braking or even a
locked in place by attempting to slide minor collision, a child not in a
the seat forward and backward and proper seat or child-restraint system
rocking the seatback. and seat belt could be thrown
forward, back or even out of the car
Seat Adjustment: resulting in serious injuries or death.
Adjusting the seat while the vehicle is The child or other objects in the
moving is dangerous. Sudden braking baggage area could be thrown into
or a collision could cause serious other occupants and cause serious
injury. Adjust the seat only when the injury. Never allow a passenger to sit
vehicle is stopped. or stand on the folded seatback while
the vehicle is moving.

NOTE
When returning a second-row seat to
its original position, also replace the
seat belt to its normal position. Verify
that the seat belt pulls and retracts.

2-19

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 20 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

▼ Seat Slide ▼ Seat Recline


To move the seat forward or backward,
raise the bar and slide the seat to the
desired position.
WARNING
Reclining:
Sitting in a reclined position while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous
because you don’t get the full
protection from seat belts. During
Bar sudden braking or a collision, you
can slide under the lap belt and suffer
serious internal injuries. For
maximum protection, sit well back
and upright.

Reclining the Second-Row Seatback:


Make sure the bar returns to its original Reclining the second-row seatback
position and the seat is locked in place by when the third-row seat is occupied is
attempting to push it forward and backward. dangerous. The second-row seatback
may hit and injure the occupants in
the third-row seat. Don’t recline the
CAUTION second-row seatback when the third-
Be careful when moving the second- row seat is occupied.
row seat while a passenger is seated on
the third-row seat. The passenger’s legs To change the seatback angle, lean
could be pinched or otherwise injured. forward slightly while pulling the strap.
Then lean back to the desired position and
To slide the seat further back, raise the bar release the strap.
and slide the knob to the right at the same
time. Slide the seat all the way back, then
release the bar and the knob.

Knob

Strap

2-20

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 21 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

Make sure the strap returns to its original Height adjustment


position and the seatback is locked in
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
place by attempting to push it forward and
desired position.
backward.
To lower the head restraint, press the stop-
catch release, then push the head restraint
CAUTION down.
When returning a rear-reclined Stop-catch release
seatback to its upright position, make
sure you support the seatback while
operating the seatback strap. If the
seatback is not supported, it will flip
forward suddenly and could cause
injury.

▼ Head Restraint

WARNING Adjust the head restraint so that the top is


Head Restraints Adjustment: parallel with the top of the passenger’s
Driving with the head restraints ears, never the passenger’s neck.
adjusted too low or removed is Removal
dangerous. With no support behind
your head, your neck could be To remove the head restraint, press the
seriously injured in a collision. stop-catch release, then pull up on the
Always drive with the head restraints head restraint.
inserted when seats are being used
and make sure they are properly Stop-catch release
adjusted.

2-21

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 22 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

▼ Removing Shoulder Restraint To return the second-row seat to its


original position, slide the seat to the
To fold the second-row seat and the front desired position and raise the seatback
seats flat, remove the shoulder restraints. upright.

Strap

▼ Third-row Seat Access ▼ Folding the Second-Row Seat


To reach the third-row seat, pull the strap
on the second-row seat, fold the seatback
forward and slide the seat forward. WARNING
Using Folded Seatback as a Table
Strap While the Vehicle is Moving:
Using the folded seatback as a table
while driving is dangerous. During a
sudden stop or collision, objects
placed on the folded seatback could
become projectiles that could hit and
injure someone. Never use the folded
seat as a table while the vehicle is
moving.

The second-row seatback can be folded


The third-row passengers have a similar down and used as a table when the vehicle
strap on the back side of the second-row is not in motion.
seat. Pull the strap to fold the seatback of
the second-row seat forward and slide the Long objects can be also placed inside
seat forward. when the front passenger seat is folded
down as well. Make sure objects are
secured.

2-22

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 23 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

3. Raise the seatback to the upright


CAUTION position. Attempt to move the seatback
forward and backward to ensure it is
Don’t sit or lie on the folded seatback. locked.
The seat could be damaged.

To fold second-row seat


1. Insert the lap belt into the pocket of the
seat bottom.

NOTE
If the seatback is not first raised to the
upright position, the seatback will not
be locked when the seatback is folded
2. Pull the strap and lower the seatback forward for other uses.
forward.
4. Lower the head restraint to the lowest
position (page 2-21).
5. Push the knob on the back of the
seatback and fold the seatback forward.

Knob

6. Make sure the seatback is locked.

2-23

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 24 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

To return the seat to the upright 2. To unlock the seat, pull the lever on the
position left or right and raise the rear portion of
the seat bottom forward.
1. Press and hold the knob on the back of
the seatback and lift the seatback
upright. Then release the knob and
continue pushing the seatback to the Lever
upright position. Attempt to move the
seatback forward and backward to
make sure it is locked.
2. Place the seat belt buckles face up.

3. To prevent the seat from falling back


down, remove the support bar from the
pocket.

Support bar

To fold and stow second-row seat


(European model)
The second-row seat can be flipped
forward to provide more cargo space.
1. Fold down the left and right seatbacks Pocket
to the table position (page 2-22).

NOTE
The support bar is kept in the pocket
under the seat.

2-24

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 25 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

4. Attach the support bar to the floor 2. To unlock the seat, pull the lever on the
anchor. left or right and raise the rear portion of
the seat bottom forward.

Lever

Floor anchor

5. Attach the opposite end of the support


bar to the catch on the seat bottom. 3. To prevent the seat from falling back
Attempt to pull the seat towards the down, attach the holding strap hook to
rear (liftgate) to make sure the support the left head restraint upright.
bar is securely latched.
Holding strap
Catch hook

Pocket

To fold and stow second-row seat


(Except European model)
WARNING
The second-row seat can be flipped Loose Seat:
forward to provide more cargo space. A seat not secured with a holding
strap is dangerous. The seat could fall
1. Fold down the left and right seatbacks down and cause serious injury.
to the table position (page 2-22). Ensure that stowed seats are secured
with holding straps.

2-25

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 26 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

4. Adjust the holding strap to tighten it 3. Carefully lower the seat backward until
securely on the head restraint upright. it locks in place. Attempt to lift the seat
up to make sure it is firmly locked
NOTE down.

The holding strap hook is kept in the


pocket under the seat.

To return second-row seat to the


original position (European model)
1. To detach the support bar, pull the lever
on the left while supporting the seat.

Lever
4. Press and hold the knob on the back of
the seatback and raise the seatback
upright. Then release the knob and
continue pushing the seatback to the
upright position. Rock the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
5. Place the seat belt buckles face up.

2. Tuck the support bar in the pocket.

NOTE
The support bar is kept in the pocket
under the seat.

2-26

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 27 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

To return second-row seat to the 4. Press and hold the knob on the back of
original position (Except European the seatback and raise the seatback
model) upright. Then release the knob and
continue pushing the seatback to the
1. Support the seat while detaching the
upright position. Rock the seatback to
holding strap hook from the head
make sure it is locked.
restraint upright so that the seat doesn’t
fall down. 5. Place the seat belt buckles face up.
2. Tuck the holding strap hook in the
pocket.

Holding strap
hook

Pocket

3. Carefully lower the seat backward until


it locks in place. Attempt to lift the seat
up to make sure it is firmly locked
down.

2-27

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 28 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

Third-Row Seat CAUTION


(7-Passenger Model)
Before using the third-row seat,
remove the luggage compartment
cover and install the caps. Sitting in the
WARNING third-row seat without the caps
installed could result in injury if you
Stacking Cargo:
were to hit them.
Stacking luggage or other cargo
higher than the seatback is
dangerous. During a sudden stop or NOTE
collision, objects can become
projectiles that could hit and injure When returning a third-row seat to its
passengers. Don’t stack things higher original position, also replace the seat
than the seatback. belt to its normal position. Verify that
the seat belt pulls and retracts.
Securing Seats:
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that
are not securely latched are
dangerous. In a sudden stop or
collision, the seat or seatback could
move, causing injury. Make sure the
adjustable components of the seat are
locked in place by attempting to rock
the seatback.

Unlocked Seatback:
A seatback plays an important role in
your protection in a vehicle. Leaving
the seatback unlocked is dangerous as
it can allow passengers to be ejected
or thrown around and baggage to
strike occupants in a sudden stop or
collision, resulting in severe injury.
After adjusting the seatback at any
time, even when there are no other
passengers, rock the seatback to make
sure it is locked in place.

2-28

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 29 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

▼ Head Restraint (Except European model)


To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
WARNING desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stop-
Head Restraints Adjustment: catch release, then push the head restraint
Driving with the head restraints down.
adjusted too low or removed is
dangerous. With no support behind Stop-catch release
your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
Always drive with the head restraints
inserted when seats are being used
and make sure they are properly
adjusted.

Height adjustment
(European model)
To use a head restraint, pull it up to the Adjust the head restraint so that the top is
locked position. parallel with the top of the passenger’s
To lower the head restraint, press the stop- ears, never the passenger’s neck.
catch release, then push the head restraint
down. Removal
To remove the head restraint, press the
Stop-catch release stop-catch release, then pull up on the
head restraint.

Stop-catch release

2-29

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 30 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

▼ Folding the Third-Row Seat 4. Reinstall the head restraints of the seat
into the back of the seatback.
The third-row seat can be flipped and
stowed forward to provide more cargo
space.

CAUTION
Do not sit or lie on the folded seatback.
The seat could be damaged.

To fold and stow third-row seat


1. Slide the second-row seat all the way
forward.
2. Remove the head restraint (page 2-29). 5. To unlock the seat, pull the handle and
raise the rear portion of the seat bottom
3. Push the lever forward to unlock and upright.
lower the seatback forward.

Lever

Handle

2-30

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 31 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

6. To prevent the seat from falling back To return third-row seat to its original
down, attach the holding strap hook to position
the left head restraint upright of the
1. Support the third-row seat while
second-row seat.
detaching the holding strap hook from
the head restraint upright so that the
Holding strap seat doesn’t fall down.
hook
2. Tuck the holding strap hook into its
pocket.

Holding strap
hook

Pocket

WARNING
Loose Seat: Pocket
A seat not secured with a holding
strap is dangerous. The seat could fall 3. Lower the third-row seat backward.
down and cause serious injury. Attempt to lift the seat up to make sure
Ensure that the stowed seat is secured it is firmly locked down.
with the holding strap.

7. Adjust the holding strap to tighten it


securely on the head restraint upright.

NOTE
The holding strap hook is kept in the
pocket under the seat.

4. Remove the head restraints from the


back of the seatback.

2-31

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 32 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

5. Raise the seatback to its upright ▼ Removal of Third-Row Seat


position. Make sure the seatback is
locked. The third-row seat can be removed to
provide more cargo space.

WARNING
Seat Removal or Installation While
Vehicle is Moving or on a Slope:
Removing or installing the third-row
seat while the vehicle is moving or on
a slope is dangerous. The seat is
heavier than it appears and could
suddenly detach causing serious
injury. Remove or install the seat with
6. Reinsert the head restraints to their the vehicle parked on a level surface.
normal positions.
Riding on the Floor Space:
7. Place the seat belt buckles face up. Riding on the floor space created by
the removal of the third-row seat is
dangerous. Sudden braking or a
collision could cause serious injury.
Do not sit or lie in the floor space for
the third-row seat while the vehicle is
moving. Never ride in a vehicle where
you can’t sit in the seat and wear the
seat belt.

Pinching Fingers or Hands:


Placing your hands around the seat
anchors when removing or installing
the third-row seat is dangerous. You
could pinch your hands or fingers
between the seat anchor and the seat.
Hold the edge of the seat when
lowering it into place. Never place
your hands between the seat anchor
and the seat.

2-32

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 33 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

4. To unlock the seat, pull the handle and


WARNING raise the rear position of the seat
bottom upright.
Unsecured Seats:
Driving with the seat unsecured is
dangerous. The seat may become
detached while the vehicle is moving
causing serious injury. After
installing the seat, attempt to push it
forward and backward to make sure it Handle
is securely locked.

To remove third-row seat


1. Remove the head restraint (page 2-29)
2. Push the lever forward to unlock and 5. Supporting the third-row seat with your
fold the seatback forward. hand and press down each seat lock
lever.
Lever
Seat lock lever

3. Reinstall the head restraints of the seat


into the back of the seatback.

2-33

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 34 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

6. Remove the seat from the front floor 2. Align the seat retaining clamps with
anchors. the front floor anchors.

Seat retaining clamp

Front floor anchor

To install third-row seat 3. Supporting the seat with your hand,


raise the seat lock levers on the left and
1. Press the seat lock levers on the left
right to lock the seat in place.
and right all the way down.

Seat lock lever Seat


lock
lever

4. Return the third-row seat to its original


position following procedure 3 through
7 of “To return third-row seat to its
original position.”

2-34

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 35 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats

▼ To Fold the Seats Flat


Flat Folding
(7-Passenger Model) 1. Remove the third-row seat (page 2-32).
2. Remove the shoulder restraints of the
The second-row and front seats can be second-row seat (page 2-22).
folded down for use as beds when the
vehicle is safely parked. 3. Pull the seat slide bar and slide the
second-row seat all the way back (page
2-20).
4. Pull the reclining strap and fold down
the second-row seatbacks rearward
until they lock (page 2-20).
5. Remove the head restraints from the
front seats (page 2-4).
6. Pull the seat slide levers and slide the
front seats all the way forward (page 2-
2).
7. Raise the reclining levers and push the
front seatbacks as far down as possible
WARNING (page 2-3).

Folded-Flat Seats: To return the seats to their road positions,


Sitting or lying on seats folded flat is reverse the procedures for folding the
a dangerous way to ride. During second-row and front seats flat.
sudden braking or a collision you
could be thrown around inside the
vehicle and seriously injured. Don’t
ride on seatbacks folded flat.

Removing and Installing Third-Row


Seat:
Removing and installing the third-
row seat alone is dangerous. Because
the seat is heavy, you could be
injured. Always have the help of at
least one other person when removing
or installing the seat.

2-35

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 36 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

Seat Belt Precautions


Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.

The front seats have lap/shoulder belts. These belts have retractors with inertia locks that
keep them out of the way when not in use. The locks allow the belts to remain comfortable
on users, but they’ll lock in position during a collision.

(5-passenger model)
The rear seats have lap/shoulder belts. These belt retractors operate in two modes,
emergency locking mode and, for child-restraint systems, automatic locking mode.

(7-passenger model)
The second-row seat has lap/shoulder belts with retractors, and a manual adjustable lap
belt. The second-row seat lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in two modes, emergency
locking mode and, for child-restraint systems, automatic locking mode. The lap belt is
manually adjusted.

The third-row seat has lap/shoulder belts that have retractors with inertia locks.

WARNING
Not Wearing Seat Belts:
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown
out of the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same
collision, occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer. Always wear your seat
belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained.

Seat Belt Damaged During an Accident:


Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt webbing
of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate protection in a
collision. Have an Authorised Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt systems in use during
an accident before they are used again.

2-36

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 37 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

WARNING
Twisted Seat Belts:
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt isn’t
available to absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt,
which could break them or cause other serious injury or death. Don’t wear twisted
seat belts.

One Belt, One Passenger:


Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used
in this way can’t spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could be
crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more
than one person at a time.

Instructions for Use of Seat Belt Assemblies:


• Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be
worn low across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be
avoided.
• Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to
provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly
reduce the protection afforded to the wearer.
• Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and
chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using
mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated, or damaged.
• It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe
impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious.
• Belts should not be worn with straps twisted.
• Each seat belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is dangerous to put a
belt around a child being carried on the occupant’s lap.
• No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent
the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

2-37

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 38 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

CAUTION
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep them
clean.

Ring

▼ Pregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions


Pregnant women should wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific recommendations.
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the
stomach area.
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your
doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.

▼ Emergency Locking Mode


If the belt has fully retracted, it will always be in the emergency locking mode until you
move it into automatic locking mode by pulling the belt all the way out to its full length. In
the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the
retractor will lock in position during a collision.
If the belt feels tight and hinders comfortable movement while the vehicle is stopped or in
motion, you may be in the automatic locking mode because you have pulled the belt too far
out. To return to the more comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until you can stop
the vehicle in a safe area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking
mode and then again extend it around you.

2-38

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 39 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

▼ Automatic Locking Mode


Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to
an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To get the seat belt into the automatic
locking mode, pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint
system. It will retract down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the
section on child restraint (page 2-49).

2-39

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 40 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

3-Point Type Seat Belt WARNING


NOTE Positioning the Shoulder Portion of
the Seat Belt:
When using the rear centre seat belt, Improper positioning of the shoulder
refer to "Rear Centre Position Seat portion of the seat belt is dangerous.
Belt" (page 2-44). An improperly positioned belt will
provide little or no protection in a
▼ Fastening the Seat Belts collision. Always make sure the
1. Grasp the buckle and tongue. shoulder portion of the seat belt is
positioned across your shoulder and
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt. near your neck, but never under your
arm, on your neck, or on your upper
arm.

4. Make sure the shoulder belt is snugly


Belt fitted against your body.

Tongue

Take up slack
Keep low on
hip bone
3. Insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear a click. Too high

Tongue
WARNING
Positioning the Lap Portion of the
Seat Belt:
The lap portion of the seat belt worn
too high is dangerous. In a collision,
Buckle this would concentrate the impact
force directly on the abdominal area,
causing serious injury. Wear the lap
portion of the belt snugly and as low
as possible.

2-40

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 41 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

▼ Unfastening the Seat Belts


7-passenger
Depress the button on the buckle. model

Seat Seat
belt belt
retainer retainer

▼ Shoulder Belt Adjuster


Adjust the height of the shoulder belt if
the seat belt touches your neck, or if it
NOTE crosses your arm instead of your shoulder.
Simply grip and pull the adjuster, move it
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it to the desired position, and then release it.
for kinks and twists. Make sure the adjuster is locked.
To secure the outboard-rear seat belts
when not in use, insert the belts in their Shoulder belt
seat belt retainers. adjuster

5-passenger Outside-rear
model seat belt

Seat
belt
retainer

2-41

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 42 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

WARNING Front Seat Belt


Pretensioner and Load
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of Limiting Systems
the Seat Belt:
Improper positioning of the shoulder For optimum protection, the driver and
portion of the seat belt is dangerous. front passenger seat belts are equipped
An improperly positioned belt will with pretensioner and load limiting
provide little or no protection in a systems.*1
collision. Always make sure the In moderate or greater frontal or near-
shoulder portion of the seat belt is frontal accidents, the front air bag and
positioned across your shoulder and pretensioner systems deploy
near your neck, but never under your simultaneously. The pretensioners take up
arm, on your neck, or on your upper slack in the front seat belts as the air bags
arm. are expanding. The load limiting system
releases belt webbing in a controlled
manner to reduce belt force on the
occupant’s chest.
*1
: Some models are equipped with the
pretensioner system only, and do not
have the load limiting system.

WARNING
Incorrect Positioning of the Driver
and Front Passenger Seat Belts:
Incorrect positioning of the driver
and passenger seat belts is dangerous.
Without proper positioning, the
pretensioner and load limiting
systems cannot provide adequate
protection in an accident and this
could result in serious injury. Wear
seat belts only as recommended in
this owner's manual.

2-42

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 43 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

NOTE
WARNING
• The pretensioner system will only
Expended Seat Belt Pretensioners: activate in a moderate or greater
Use of front seat belts with the frontal or near-frontal collision. It
pretensioner system expended is will not activate in side or rear
dangerous. impacts.
The seat belt pretensioners will only
function once. After they are • Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will be
expended, they will not work again released when the air bags and
and must be replaced immediately, pretensioners deploy. This does not
even if there was no front seat indicate a fire. This gas normally
occupant seated at the time. has no effect on occupants,
If the seat belt pretensioners are not however, those with sensitive skin
replaced, the risk of injury in a may experience light skin irritation.
collision will increase. If residue from the deployment of
Always have an Authorised Mazda the air bags or the front pretensioner
Dealer inspect and replace the seat system gets on the skin or in the
belt pretensioners after a collision. eyes, wash it off as soon as possible.

Modification or Testing of the


Pretensioner System:
Modifying the components or wiring
of the pretensioner system, including
the use of electronic testing devices is
dangerous. You could accidentally
activate it or make it inoperable which
would prevent it from activating in an
accident. The occupants could be
seriously injured. Never modify the
components or wiring, or use
electronic testing devices on the
pretensioner system.

Pretensioner System Disposal:


Improper disposal of the pretensioner
system or a vehicle with non-
deactivated pretensioners is
dangerous. Unless all safety
procedures are followed, injury could
result. Ask an Authorised Mazda
Dealer how to safely dispose of the
pretensioner system or how to scrap a
pretensioner-equipped vehicle.

2-43

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 44 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

▼ Air Bag/Front Seat Belt


Pretensioner Systems Warning Rear Centre Position Seat
Light Belt (5-Passenger Model)
Before using the rear-centre lap/shoulder
belt make sure tongue (A) and anchor
buckle (B) are fastened.

(A)

If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner (B)


system is OK, the warning light comes on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position or after the engine is cranked.
After about 6 seconds it goes out.

A system malfunction is indicated when


the warning light constantly flashes, stays
on or doesn’t come on at all. If any of
▼ Fastening the Seat Belt
these occur, consult an Authorised Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system 1. Grasp the buckle (D) and tongue (C).
may not work in an accident.
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.
3. Insert the tongue (C) into the buckle
WARNING (D) until you hear a click.
Self-Servicing the Air Bag/
Pretensioner Systems:
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled. This
could cause serious injuries. Never (C) (A)
tamper with the systems and always
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
perform all servicing and repairs.
(D) (B)

2-44

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 45 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

4. Make sure the shoulder belt is snugly


WARNING fitted against your body.

Fastening the Rear-Center Seat Belt


with Only One Buckle:
WARNING
Fastening the rear-center seat belt
Positioning the Lap Portion of the
with only one buckle is dangerous. If
Seat Belt:
only one pair of seat belt tongue and
The lap portion of the seat belt worn
buckle, either tongue (A) and anchor
too high is dangerous. In a collision,
buckle (B) or tongue (C) and anchor
this would concentrate the impact
buckle (D), is fastened, the seat belt
force directly on the abdominal area,
cannot provide full protection. In a
causing serious injury. Wear the lap
sudden stop or collision, the user
portion of the belt snugly and as low
could slide under the belt and suffer
as possible.
serious injuries. Always make sure
that both pairs of seat belt tongues
and buckles are fastened properly. ▼ Unfastening the Seat Belt
Depress the button on the buckle.
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of
the Seat Belt:
Improper positioning of the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.
An improperly positioned belt will
provide little or no protection in a
collision. Always make sure the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
positioned across your shoulder and
near your neck, but never under your
arm, on your neck, or on your upper
arm.

Using Centre-Rear Seat Belt:


Using the centre-rear seat belt with
the left-rear head restraint removed is
dangerous. The seat belt will not
provide adequate protection with the
left-rear head restraint removed
because the seat belt is not positioned
properly. The user could be seriously
injured in an accident. Always use the
centre-rear seat belt with the left-rear
head restraint installed.

2-45

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 46 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

▼ Unfastening the Lap Portion of ▼ Fastening the Lap Portion of the


the Seat Belt Seat Belt
Insert a small object in the anchor buckle Grasp tongue (A) and insert it into the
(B) slot, such as a key. anchor buckle (B) until you hear a click. It
is now secure for passenger use.

NOTE
After returning the rear-left seatback to
(B) its upright position, fasten the lap
portion of the belt.

CAUTION
Always unfasten the lap portion of the
belt before folding the rear-left
seatback. Leaving the lap portion of
the belt fastened could cause damage
to the seat belt, buckle and seatback.

To secure the centre-rear seat belt when


not in use, insert the belt in the seat belt
retainer.

Centre-rear seat belt

Seat
belt
retainer

2-46

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 47 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

• To shorten, pull the loose end of the


2-Point Type Seat Belt webbing.
(7-Passenger Model)
Shorten
▼ Fastening the Seat Belts
1. Pull the tongue to the desired length.
2. Insert it into the buckle until you hear a
click.

Tongue
4. Make sure the lap belt is snugly fitted
against your body.

Buckle

3. Adjust the belt length.


• To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue
at a right angle to the webbing and
pull.
l

Lengthen

WARNING
Wearing the Lap Belt:
A lap belt worn too high is dangerous.
In a collision, this would concentrate
the impact force directly on the
abdominal area, causing serious
injury. Wear the lap belt snugly and
as low as possible.

2-47

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 48 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Seat Belt Systems

▼ Unfastening the Seat Belts


Seat Belt Warning Light
Depress the button on the buckle. (Except European Model)

If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened


when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the seat belt warning light
will remain on until the belt is fastened.
If the system does not operate correctly,
consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

2-48

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 49 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

Child Restraint Precautions


Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use
them.

Mazda recommends use of a Mazda genuine child-restraint system or one that complies
with European regulations (ECE R44). If you would like to purchase a Mazda genuine
child-restraint system, please contact an Authorised Mazda Dealer.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety
of children riding in your vehicle.

Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual
child-restraint system.

A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts.

Statistics confirm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age-
the more so with a supplementary restraint system (air bags).

A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used in the front seat because it
would be too close to the air bag. The front passenger’s seat is also the least preferred seat
for other child-restraint systems.

WARNING
Proper Size of Child-Restraint System:
For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be
properly restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and
size. If not, the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.

Follow the Manufacturer’s Instructions and Always Keep the Child-Restraint System
Buckled Down:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make sure
the child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-restraint
system manufacturer’s instructions. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or
fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH ISOFIX bars.

2-49

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 50 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

WARNING
Holding a Child While the Vehicle is Moving:
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a sudden
stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or other
occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag forces
that could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be slammed
into the adult, injuring the adult. Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint
system.

Rear-Facing Child-Restraint System:


Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child-restraint system on a seat protected
by an air bag in front of it.
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child. NEVER use a rear-facing
child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that could deploy.
Deploying air bag

If your vehicle is equipped with a passenger air bag, a warning label as shown below
is attached. The warning label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint
system on the front passenger’s seat at any time.

2-50

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 51 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

WARNING
Children and Seating Position with Side Air Bag:
Allowing anyone to lean over or against the front door is dangerous. If the vehicle is
equipped with side air bags, the impact of an inflating side air bag could cause serious
injury or death to the person. Children are more likely to sleep in the vehicle; when
they do, they are more at risk in the front passenger’s seat that has a side air bag
because they may slump over into the path of the seatback-mounted air bag.
Furthermore, leaning over or against the doors could block the side air bag and
eliminate the advantages of supplementary protection. With the front air bag and the
additional side air bag that comes out of the front seat, the rear seat is always a better
location for children who are prone to sleeping. If a child can’t be seated in the rear,
do not allow the child to lean over or against the front door, even if the child is seated
in a child-restraint system.

One Belt, One Passenger:


Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used
in this way can’t spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could be
crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more
than one person at a time.

CAUTION
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during
warm weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your child
touches them.

NOTE
Your Mazda is equipped with ISOFIX bars for attachment of Mazda genuine child-
restraint systems in the rear (or second-row) outboard seats. When using these bars to
secure a child-restraint system, refer to "ISOFIX Bar-Secured Child-Restraint Systems"
(page 2-62).

2-51

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 52 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

Categories of Child-Restraint Systems (Europe)


Child-restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups according to European
regulations (ECE R44).

Group Age Weight


0 Up to 9 months old Less than 10 kg (less than 22 lb)
0+ Up to 2 years old Less than 13 kg (less than 29 lb)
1 8 months to 4 years old 9 kg — 18 kg (20 lb — 40 lb)
2 3 to 7 years old 15 kg — 25 kg (33 lb — 55 lb)
3 6 to 12 years old 22 kg — 36 kg (48 lb — 79 lb)

NOTE
When purchasing, ask the manufacturer of the child-restraint system which type of
child-restraint system is appropriate for your child and vehicle.

2-52

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 53 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

Child seat
Child-Restraint System Equal to Group 1 of European regulations
Installation Position (ECE R44).
(Europe)
In this owner’s manual, explanation of
child-restraint systems secured with seat
belts is provided for the following three
types of popular child-restraint systems:
baby seat, child seat, booster seat.

NOTE
Installation position is determined by
the type of child-restraint system.
Always read the manufacturer’s Booster seat
instructions and this owner’s manual Equal to Group 2 and 3 of European
carefully. regulations (ECE R44).
Baby seat
Equal to Group 0 and 0 of European
regulations (ECE R44).

2-53

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 54 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

▼ Baby Seat Installation Position


A baby seat is used in the rear-facing WARNING
position only.
Baby Seat Installation:
Installing a baby seat without first
consulting the table "Child-Restraint
System Suitability for Various Seat
Positions" is dangerous. A baby seat
installed on the wrong seat position
cannot be properly secured. In a
collision, the child could hit
something or someone in the vehicle
Rear seat and be seriously injured or even
killed. Never install a baby seat in the
wrong seat position.

Refer to the table, "Child-Restraint Rear-Facing Child-Restraint System:


System Suitability for Various Seat Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-
Positions" for baby seat installation facing child-restraint system on a seat
position (page 2-58). protected by an air bag in front of it.
The child-restraint system can be hit
by the deploying air bag and knocked
out of position. A child in the child-
restraint system could be seriously
injured or killed. Never use a rear-
facing child-restraint system on the
front passenger’s seat protected by an
air bag.
Deploying air bag

2-54

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 55 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

▼ Child Seat Installation Position Rear-facing type


Refer to the table, "Child-Restraint
A child seat is used in front-facing and System Suitability for Various Seat
rear-facing positions depending on the age Positions" for rear-facing child seat
and size of the child. When installing, installation position (page 2-58).
follow the manufacturer’s instructions in
accordance with the appropriate age and
size of the child as well as the directions WARNING
for installing the child-restraint system.
Rear-facing Child Seat Installation:
Installing a rear-facing child seat
without first consulting the table
"Child-Restraint System Suitability
for Various Seat Positions" is
dangerous. A rear-facing child seat
installed on the wrong seat position
cannot be properly secured. In a
collision, the child could hit
something or someone in the vehicle
and be seriously injured or even
killed. Never install a rear-facing
child seat in the wrong seat position.

Rear-Facing Child-Restraint System:


Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-
facing child-restraint system on a seat
protected by an air bag in front of it.
The child-restraint system can be hit
by the deploying air bag and knocked
out of position. A child in the child-
restraint system could be seriously
injured or killed. Never use a rear-
facing child-restraint system on the
front passenger’s seat protected by an
air bag.
Deploying air bag

2-55

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 56 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

Front-facing type ▼ Booster Seat Installation Position


Refer to the table, "Child-Restraint
System Suitability for Various Seat A booster seat is used in the front-facing
Positions" for front-facing child seat position only.
installation position (page 2-58).
Rear seat
WARNING
Front-facing Child Seat Installation:
Installing a front-facing child seat
without first consulting the table
"Child-Restraint System Suitability
for Various Seat Positions" is
dangerous. A front-facing child seat
installed on the wrong seat position
cannot be properly secured. In a Refer to the table, "Child-Restraint
collision, the child could hit System Suitability for Various Seat
something or someone in the vehicle Positions" for booster seat installation
and be seriously injured or even position (page 2-58).
killed. Never install a front-facing
child seat in the wrong seat position.

Front Passenger’s Seat Position:


If your vehicle is equipped with a
passenger air bag, a front-facing
child-restraint system could be put on
the front seat only when it is
unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force
of a deploying air bag could cause
serious injury or death to the child.

2-56

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 57 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

WARNING
Booster Seat Installation:
Installing a booster seat without first
consulting the table "Child-Restraint
System Suitability for Various Seat
Positions" is dangerous. A booster
seat installed on the wrong seat
position cannot be properly secured.
In a collision, the child could hit
something or someone in the vehicle
and be seriously injured or even
killed. Never install a booster seat in
the wrong seat position.

Front Passenger’s Seat Position:


If your vehicle is equipped with a
passenger air bag, a front-facing
child-restraint system could be put on
the front seat only when it is
unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force
of a deploying air bag could cause
serious injury or death to the child.

2-57

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 58 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

Child-Restraint System Suitability for Various Seat


Positions Table (Europe)
This table contains information on the suitability of Mazda genuine child-restraint systems.
For installation suitability of other manufacturer child-restraint system, carefully consult
the manufacturer’s instructions which accompany the child-restraint system.

Seating position
European 5-passenger
Front passenger’s seat 7-passenger model
regulation model
(ECE R44) Child-
Age Weight restraint Position With passenger
Child- air bag
restraint
group group system Without Rear Rear Second- Second Third-
system
type passenger Without With air seat seat row seat -row row
air bag bag cut- seat
groups air bag (outside) (centre) (outside) (centre) seat
cut-off off
system system
Up to 9 Less than
Rear-
GROUP 0 months 10 kg (less Baby seat facing S X S*2 S S S X S
old than 22 lb)
Less than
+ Up to 2 13 Rear-
GROUP 0 years old kg (less Baby seat
facing
S X S*2 S S S X S
than 29 lb)
9 kg — Front-
8 months 18kg facing
S X S*3 S*4 S S*4 X S
(20
GROUP 1 to 4
lb — 40 Child seat Rear-
years old lb) X X X X X X X X
facing
15 kg —
3 to 7 25 kg Booster Front-
GROUP 2 years
old (33 lb — seat facing
S S*1 S*3 S S S X S
55 lb)
22 kg —
6 to 12 36 kg Booster Front-
GROUP 3 years
old (48 lb — seat facing
S S*1 S*3 S S S X S
79 lb)

S: Seat position is suitable for child-restraint system in this group.


X: Seat position is not suitable for child in this group.
*1: Move the front passenger’s seat as far as back possible.
*2: Use only a Mazda genuine child-restraint system designed for Mazda’s air bag cut-off
system (page 2-62).
*3: Use a Mazda genuine child-restraint system designed for Mazda’s air bag cut-off
system or move passenger’s seat as far as back possible (page 2-62).
*4: ISOFIX bar-secured child-restraint systems can be used.

2-58

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 59 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

3. To get the retractor into the automatic


Installing Child-Restraint locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
Systems portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
When installing a child-restraint system,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

(5-passenger model)
All the rear seat belts can be easily
converted to the automatic locking mode,
which must be done to secure the child-
restraint system.
(7-passenger model)
The second-row outboard seat belts can be
easily converted to the automatic locking
mode, which must be done to secure the
child-restraint system.
4. Push the child-restraint system firmly
▼ Rear Seat Child-Restraint into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt
System Installation (Using retracts as snugly as possible. Clicking
Automatic Locking Mode) from the retractor will be heard during
retraction if the system is in the
Follow these instructions when using the
automatic locking mode. If the belt
automatic locking mode for a child-
does not lock the seat down tight,
restraint system.
repeat this step.
1. If the seat in which you install a child-
restraint system has a seat slide
function, slide the seat as far back as
possible.
2. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the instructions on the child-
restraint system for belt routing
instructions.

2-59

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 60 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

NOTE Anchor bracket location


(5-passenger model, type B)
Inspect this function before each use of Factory-installed
the child-restraint system. You should anchor bracket
not be able to pull the shoulder belt out
of the retractor while the system is in
the automatic locking mode. When
you remove the child-restraint system,
Child-restraint
be sure the belt fully retracts to return
system anchorages
the system to emergency locking mode (Anchor bracket NOT
before occupants use the seat belts. factory-installed)

5. If your child-restraint system requires Tether strap position


the use of a tether strap, hook and (5-passenger model, type B)
tighten the tether strap by following the
manufacturer’s instructions. Tether strap

Anchor bracket
location (5-passenger
model, type A) Anchor
bracket

Rear seat
NOTE
For left seat (5-passenger model, type B)
For right seat
• To use the child-restraint system
Tether strap position anchor bracket, peel back the pre-
(5-passenger model, type A) cut portion of the carpeting behind
the centre seat position.
Tether strap
• There are no factory-installed child-
restraint system anchor brackets at
the outboard seat positions. To use
an anchor bracket in one of the
outboard seat positions, remove the
anchor bracket for the centre seat
Anchor position and install it in the
bracket
outboard position. For additional
assistance, consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer.

2-60

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 61 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

Anchor bracket
location
(7-passenger model)
WARNING
Child-Restraint Tether Usage:
Child-restraint system anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly installed
Second-row seat child-restraint systems.Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
For adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
right attaching other items or equipment to
For left seat seat
the vehicle.
Tether strap position
(7-passenger model) Incorrect Positioning of the Tether
Strap:
Tether strap Positioning the tether strap on top of
the head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision, the head restraint could
bend or break. This will cause the
strap to loosen. The child-restraint
system could move and injure the
child or someone else. Always
Anchor position the tether strap between the
bracket
head restraint and the seatback.

2-61

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 62 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

Air Bag Cut-Off System ISOFIX Bar-Secured


If your vehicle is equipped with an air bag
Child-Restraint Systems
cut-off system, and a child-restraint Your Mazda is equipped with ISOFIX
system designed for Mazda’s air bag cut- bars for attachment of Mazda genuine
off system is installed, the front child-restraint systems in the outboard
passenger’s seat supplementary restraint rear (or second-row) seats.
system (air bag system) will be Contact your Authorised Mazda Dealer
deactivated (page 2-76). for further information on the Mazda
genuine child-restraint system.

WARNING
Manufacturer’s Instructions for
Child-Restraint System:
An unsecured child-restraint system
is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a
collision it could move causing
serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants. Make sure the child-
restraint system is properly secured in
NOTE place according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
If you would like to purchase a Mazda
genuine child-restraint system Unsecured Child-Restraint System:
designed for the Mazda’s air bag cut- A child-restraint system that is not
off system, please contact an secured is dangerous. In a sudden
Authorised Mazda Dealer. stop or collision, it can become a
projectile and hit someone, causing
serious injury. When not in use,
remove it from the vehicle, put it in
the luggage compartment or at least
make sure it is securely fastened to
the ISOFIX bars.

2-62

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 63 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

▼ Child-Restraint System
WARNING Installation Procedure
1. If the seat in which you install a child-
ISOFIX Bar-Secured Child-Restraint restraint system has a seat slide
Systems: function, slide the seat as far back as
Not following the child-restraint possible.
system manufacturer’s instructions
when installing the child-restraint 2. Make sure the seatback is securely
system is dangerous. If seat belts or a latched by rocking the seatback.
foreign object prevent the child- 3. Expand the area between the seat
restraint system from being securely bottom and the seatback slightly to
attached to the ISOFIX bars and the verify the locations of the ISOFIX bar.
child-restraint system is installed
improperly, the child-restraint system 5-passenger model
could move in a sudden stop or
collision causing serious injury or For left seat
death to the child or other occupants.
When installing the child-restraint ISOFIX
system, make sure there are no seat bar
belts or foreign objects near or
around the ISOFIX bars. Always Rear seat
follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer’s instructions. For right seat

7-passenger model
For left seat

ISOFIX
bar

Second-row seat

For right seat

4. Secure the child-restraint system using


ISOFIX bar, following the child-
restraint system manufacturer’s
instruction.

2-63

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 64 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

5. If your child-restraint system came Tether strap position


equipped with a tether, that probably (5-passenger model, type B)
means it is very important to properly
secure the tether for child safety, please Tether strap
carefully follow the child-restraint
system manufacturer’s instructions
when installing tethers.
Anchor
bracket
Anchor bracket
location (5-passenger
model, type A)

NOTE
Rear seat (5-passenger model, type B)
There are no factory-installed child-
restraint system anchor brackets at the
For left seat
For right seat
outboard seat positions. To use an
anchor bracket in one of the outboard
Tether strap position seat positions, peel back the pre-cut
(5-passenger model, type A) portion of the carpeting behind the
centre seat position and remove the
Tether strap anchor bracket and install it in the
outboard position. For additional
assistance, consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer.

Anchor bracket
location
Anchor (7-passenger model)
bracket

Anchor bracket location


(5-passenger model, type B)
Factory-installed Second-row seat
anchor bracket

For
right
For left seat seat

Child-restraint
system anchorages
(Anchor bracket NOT
factory-installed)

2-64

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 65 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

Child Restraint

Tether strap position


(7-passenger model)

Tether strap

Anchor
bracket

WARNING
Child-Restraint Tether Usage:
Child-restraint system anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly installed
child-restraint systems.Under no
circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to
the vehicle.

Incorrect Positioning of the Tether


Strap:
Positioning the tether strap on top of
the head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision, the head restraint could
bend or break. This will cause the
strap to loosen. The child-restraint
system could move and injure the
child or someone else. Always
position the tether strap between the
head restraint and the seatback.

2-65

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 66 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

Supplementary Restraint Systems (SRS) Precautions


Read this owner’s manual carefully to verify what air bags (driver-side air bag, passenger-
side air bag, side air bags) are equipped in your vehicle.

The front and side supplementary restraint systems (SRS) include 4 air bags (verify "SRS
AIR BAG" location indicator marks).
They are located in:

• The steering wheel hub


• The passenger side instrument panel
• The outboard sides of the front seatbacks

These systems operate independently depending on the type of accident encountered; if


you have side air bags, the side air bags are not likely to deploy on both sides in the same
accident because a vehicle is not often hit from both sides. The side air bags work together
but they and the frontal air bag system will not normally deploy during the same type of
accident unless a combination of frontal and side impacts occur.

The air bag supplementary restraint systems are designed to provide only supplementary
protection only in the front seats in a few modes, so seat belts become important in the
following ways:

Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.
Seat belt usage is necessary to:
• Keep the passenger away from an inflating air bag.
• Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag
inflation, such as roll-over or rear impact.
• Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal or side collisions that are not severe enough
to activate the air bags.
• Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.
• Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the
air bags provide no protection to these parts.
• Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.

A child who is too small to use a seat belt must be properly secured using a child-restraint
system (page 2-49).

2-66

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 67 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the
installation directions in this Owner’s Manual as well as the child-restraint system
manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING
Air Bags without Seat Belts:
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous.
Alone, air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be
expected to inflate only in collisions with frontal, near frontal or side forces that are at
least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.

Child in the Front Seat:


Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be
hit by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. A sleeping child is
more likely to lean against the door and be hit by the side air bag in moderate, right-
side collision. Whenever possible, always secure a child 12 years and under on the
rear seats with an appropriate child-restraint system for the child’s age and size.

Rear-Facing Child-Restraint System:


Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child-restraint system on a seat protected
by an air bag in front of it.
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child. NEVER use a rear-facing
child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that could deploy.
Deploying air bag

Seating Position with Front Air Bags:


Sitting too close to the air bag storage compartments or placing hands or feet on them
is extremely dangerous. Front Air bags inflate with great force and speed. Serious
injuries could occur if someone is too close. The driver should always hold onto only
the rim of the steering wheel. The front seat passenger should keep both feet on the
floor. Front seat occupants should adjust their seats as far back as possible and
always sit upright against the seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.

2-67

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 68 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

WARNING
Seating Position with Side Air Bags:
Sitting too close to the side air bag storage compartments or placing hands on them is
extremely dangerous. A side air bag inflates with great force and speed directly out of
the outboard shoulder of the front seat and expands along the front door on the side
the car is hit.
Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the door or leaning
against a window in the front seats or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front
seatbacks. Furthermore, sleeping up against the door or hanging out the driver’s-side
window while driving could block the side air bag and eliminate the advantages of
supplementary protection. Give the side airbags room to work by sitting in the centre
of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly.

Front Air Bag Storage Areas:


Attaching an object to a front air bag storage area or placing something in front of it
is dangerous. In an accident, the object could interfere with front air bag inflation
and injure the occupants.
Always keep the front air bag storage areas free of objects.

Side Air Bag Storage Areas:


Attaching things to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the
seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side
air bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is
dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open spewing exhaust.
Do not hang net bags, map pouches or back pads with side straps on the front seats.
Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag storage areas in
your front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.

Hot Air Bag Inflators:


Hot air bag inflators are dangerous. Immediately after inflation, the inflators in the
steering wheel, instrument panel or the seatbacks are very hot. You could get burned.
Don’t touch the internal components of the air bag storage areas after the bags have
inflated.

Installation of Front-End Equipment:


Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar,
bull bar, push bar, etc.), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The air bag crash sensor
system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate unexpectedly, or it could
prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident. Front occupants could be
seriously injured. Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle.

2-68

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 69 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

WARNING
Suspension Adjustment:
Adjusting the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle’s height or the suspension
is changed, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision resulting in
incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.

Modification of the Supplementary Restraint System:


Modifying the components or wiring of the supplementary restraint system is
dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Don’t make any
modifications to the supplementary restraint system. This includes installing trim,
badges, or anything else over the air bag storage areas. It also includes installing
extra electric equipment on or near system components or wiring. An Authorised
Mazda Dealer can provide the special care needed in the removal and installation of
front seats. It is important to protect the side air bag wiring and connections to assure
that the bags do not accidentally deploy and that the seats retain an undamaged air
bag connection.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the side air bag wiring, don’t place luggage or other objects under
the front seats.

NOTE
• When an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be
released. Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may
cause light skin injuries on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.
• Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems
and that familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner’s Manual, is
important.
• This highly-visible label warns against the use of rear-facing child-restraint systems
in the front seat.

2-69

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 70 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

Air Bag System Description


The supplementary restraint systems (SRS) have two basic subsystems:
• The air bag system with inflators and air bags.
• The electric system with crash sensors and diagnostic module.
The air bags are mounted in the following locations: the centre of the steering wheel, the
passenger-side of the instrument panel, and in the outboard sides of the front seatbacks.
They are out of sight until activated.

Inflator and air bag Inflators and air bags

Side crash sensor


Crash sensors and
diagnostic module
(SAS unit)

Inflator and air bag


Side crash sensor

▼ How the Air Bags Work


When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal or side impact of greater than moderate force,
an electrical current is sent to the inflators.
Gases are produced to inflate the air bags and after the inflation, the air bags quickly
deflate.
The air bags will function only once. After that, the air bags will not work again and
must be replaced.
Only an Authorised Mazda Dealer can replace the systems.

The side air bag will deploy only on the side


the vehicle receives the force of the impact.

2-70

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 71 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

▼ Air Bag Activation/Deactivation


Front air bag activation
A greater than moderate impact will cause the front air bags to inflate in the following
cases:

Hitting a solid wall straight on at greater Frontal impact within about a 30 degree
than about 22 km/h (14 mph). range from head-on to the vehicle.

Hitting a curb, pavement edge or hard Driving into a big hole or hitting the far
object. side of a hole.

Landing hard or the vehicle falling.

2-71

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 72 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

Limitations to front air bag activation


Depending on the severity of impact, the front air bags may not inflate in the following
cases:

Impacts involving trees or poles cause severe Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail
cosmetic damage but may not have enough gate may not provide the stopping force
impact to activate the air bag. necessary for air bag deployment.

Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not


provide the stopping force necessary for air
bag deployment.

Non-activation of front air bags


Front air bags will not normally inflate in the following cases:

Collision from the rear. Vehicle roll-over, may deploy the side air
bag(s) but not the front air bags.

Impact to the side, but it may deploy a side


air bag.

2-72

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 73 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

Side air bag activation


Greater than moderate impact to one side of the vehicle (driver or passenger side areas) will
cause a side air bag to inflate, but it will not normally deploy the front air bags.

Limitations to side air bag activation


Depending on the severity of impact, a side air bag may not inflate in the following cases:

Frontal offset impact may not provide Vehicle roll-over may not provide enough
enough side impact to deploy a side air bag. side force to deploy the side air bags.

Side impacts involving trees or poles can Side impacts with two-wheeled vehicles
cause severe cosmetic damage but may not may not provide enough force to deploy a
have enough impact force to activate a side side air bag.
air bag.

2-73

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 74 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

Non-activation of side air bag


A side air bag will not normally inflate in the following cases:

Collision from the rear. Collision from the front, but it may deploy
the front air bags.

2-74

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 75 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

▼ Constant Monitoring A system malfunction is indicated when


the warning light constantly flashes, stays
The following components of the air bag on or doesn’t come on at all. If any of
systems are monitored by a diagnostic these occur, consult an Authorised Mazda
system: Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.
• SAS unit
• Air bag modules WARNING
• Side air bag crash sensor
Self-Servicing the Air Bag/
• Front seat belt pretensioners Pretensioner Systems:
• Related wiring Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
• Air bag cut-off system pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled. This
A diagnostic module continuously could cause serious injuries. Never
monitors the systems’ readiness. This tamper with the systems and always
begins when the ignition switch is turned have an Authorised Mazda Dealer
to the ON position and continues while perform all servicing and repairs.
the vehicle is being driven.
▼ Air Bag Cut-Off System
▼ Air Bag/Front Seat Belt When a child-restraint system designed
Pretensioner Systems Warning for Mazda’s air bag cut-off system is
Light installed on the front passenger seat or if
the front passenger seat isn’t occupied, the
air bag cut-off system deactivates the front
and side air bags and the seat belt
pretensioner system of the front passenger
seat.

If you would like to purchase a Mazda


genuine child-restraint system designed
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner for Mazda’s air bag cut-off system,
system is OK, the warning light comes on consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer.
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position or after the engine is cranked.
After about 6 seconds it goes out.

2-75

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 76 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

▼ Air Bag Cut-Off System


Indicator Light WARNING
Sitting on Additional Seat Cushion:
Sitting on an additional seat cushion
on the front passenger seat is
dangerous. The air bag cut-off system
may not function properly because
the additional seat cushion could
cause sensor interference. During an
This light comes on when the ignition accident, the front seat passenger will
switch is turned to the ON position. not have the supplementary
protection of the air bag. This could
After about 6 seconds it goes out if a result in serious injuries. Do not sit
child-restraint system designed for on an additional seat cushion on the
Mazda’s air bag cut-off system is not front passenger seat.
installed on the front passenger seat.

This light comes on and stays on when a CAUTION


child-restraint system designed for
Mazda’s air bag cut-off system is installed To prevent damage to the seat sensors
on the front passenger seat. The front installed in the seat bottom, don’t place
passenger seat’s front and side air bags anything sharp on the seat bottom or
and the seat belt pretensioner system are leave heavy luggage on it for a long
also turned off. time.

The air bag cut-off indicator light doesn’t


come on when: NOTE
• There is no passenger on the front The system requires about 7 seconds to
passenger seat. (The front passenger alternate between turning the air bag
seat’s front and side air bags and the system on or off.
seat belt pretensioner system are turned
off.)
• A regular child-restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat, or
luggage or cargo is placed on the seat.
(The air bag cut-off indicator light isn’t
on, the front passenger seat’s front and
side air bags and the seat belt
pretensioner system can still activate in
an accident.)

2-76

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 77 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

▼ Maintenance
The air bag systems do not require regular WARNING
maintenance. But if any of the following
occurs, take your vehicle to an Authorised Damaged Air Bag Sensors:
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible: Driving with damaged air bag sensors
is dangerous. A collision, even one
• The air bag system warning light not strong enough to inflate the air
flashes. bags, could damage the sensors. If
• The air bag system warning light stays there was a subsequent collision, a
on. damaged sensor would not inflate the
air bags. Always have an Authorised
• The air bag system warning light stays Mazda Dealer inspect the air bag
off when the ignition switch is turned systems after a collision.
to the ON position.
• The air bags inflate. Removing Interior Parts:
Removing any components such as
• The air bag cut-off system indicator the front seat, front instrument panel,
light comes on when: the steering wheel or parts containing
• A child-restraint system designed air bag parts or sensors is dangerous.
for Mazda’s air bag cut-off system is These parts contain essential air bag
not installed on the front passenger parts. The air bag could accidentally
seat. activate and cause serious injuries.
Always have an Authorised Mazda
• A passenger is sitting in the front
Dealer remove these parts.
passenger seat or there is nothing
placed on the front passenger seat.
Air Bag Disposal:
• The air bag cut-off indicator light Improper disposal of an air bag or a
doesn’t come on when a child-restraint vehicle with live air bags in it can be
system designed for Mazda’s air bag extremely dangerous. Unless all
cut-off system is installed on the front safety procedures are followed, injury
passenger seat. can result. Ask an Authorised Mazda
Dealer how to safely dispose of an air
bag or how to scrap an air bag
equipped vehicle.

2-77

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 78 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Essential Safety Equipment

SRS Air Bags

NOTE
Should you sell your Mazda, we urge
you to tell the new owner of its
supplementary restraint systems and
that familiarization with all
instructions about them, from the
Owner’s Manual, is important.

2-78

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

3 Knowing Your Mazda

Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment


of various parts.

Doors and Locks .......................................................................... 3- 2


Keys ......................................................................................... 3- 2
Keyless Entry System .............................................................. 3- 3
Door Locks .............................................................................. 3- 6
Liftgate .................................................................................... 3- 9
Power Windows ....................................................................... 3-12
Fuel-Filler Flap and Cap .......................................................... 3-15
Bonnet ..................................................................................... 3-16
Sunroof ................................................................................... 3-17

Security System ........................................................................... 3-20


Immobilizer System ................................................................ 3-20
Theft-Deterrent System ........................................................... 3-22
Double Locking System .......................................................... 3-24

Steering Wheel and Mirrors ...................................................... 3-26


Steering Wheel ........................................................................ 3-26
Mirrors ..................................................................................... 3-26

3-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

The keys operate all locks.


Keys
Without immobilizer system

WARNING
Keys and Children:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous. This could
result in someone being badly injured
or even killed. They could play with
power windows or other controls, or Key code number plate
even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in your vehicle with
children. With immobilizer system

CAUTION
(With immobilizer system)
• To avoid damage to the key, do not:
• Drop the key. Key code number plate
• Get the key wet.
• Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
• Expose the key to high A code number is stamped on the plate
temperatures on places such as attached to the key set; detach this plate
the instrument panel or bonnet, and store it in a safe place (not in the
under direct sunlight. vehicle) for use if you need to make a
• When starting the engine, do not let replacement key.
the following materials touch the
key grip. The engine may not start: Also write down the code number and
keep it in another safe and handy place,
• Spare keys. but not in the vehicle.
• Keys for other vehicles equipped
with an immobilizer system. If your key is lost, consult your
• Metal objects that touch or pass Authorised Mazda Dealer with the code
through the hole in the key. number ready.
• Devices for electronic purchases,
and security passage.

3-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Transmitter
Keyless Entry System
This system locks and unlocks the doors
and the liftgate. Lock button
Press the button slowly and accurately.

CAUTION
To avoid damage to the transmitter, do
not:
Unlock button
• Drop it.
• Get it wet.
• Disassemble it. NOTE
• Expose it to heat or sunlight.
• If the LOCK and UNLOCK button
are pressed sequentially, the hazard
NOTE warning flasher may not flash
correctly.
• The keyless entry system is
designed to operate up to 1 m (3 ft) • If your vehicle has a theft-deterrent
from around the vehicle, but this system, the hazard warning light
may vary because of local only flashes when the system is
conditions. armed or turned off.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system
• The system doesn’t operate when (page 3-22).
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. Lock button
• If the transmitter does not operate To lock the doors and the liftgate, press
when pressing a button or the the LOCK button and the hazard warning
operation range becomes too small, lights will flash once.
the battery may be dead. To install a
new battery, refer to Maintenance NOTE
(page 3-4).
• Additional transmitters can be • Make sure all doors and the liftgate
obtained at an Authorised Mazda are locked after pressing the button.
Dealer. Up to 3 transmitters can be • If your vehicle has a double locking
used with the keyless entry system system, pressing the LOCK button
per vehicle. Bring all transmitters to twice within 3 seconds will activate
an Authorised Mazda Dealer when the system.
the electronic codes need to be Refer to the double locking
reset. system(page 3-24).

3-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Unlock button ▼ Transmitter Maintenance


To unlock the doors and the liftgate, press
the UNLOCK button and the hazard CAUTION
warning lights will flash twice.
• Make sure the battery is installed
NOTE with the correct pole facing upward.
Battery leakage could occur if it is
After unlocking with the transmitter, not installed correctly.
all doors and the liftgate will
• When replacing the battery, be
automatically lock if one of the doors
careful not to bend the electrical
or the liftgate is not opened within
terminals or get oil on them. Also
about 30 seconds.
be careful not to get dirt in the
transmitter as it could damage it.
• Danger of explosion if battery is
incorrectly replaced.
• Replace only with the same type
battery (CR2025 or the equivalent).
• Dispose of used batteries according
to the following instructions.
• Insulate the plus and minus
terminals of the battery using
cellophane or equivalent tape.
• Never disassemble.
• Never throw the battery into fire
and/or water.
• Never deform or crush.

3-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Replacing the transmitter battery 3. Put in the new battery (CR2025 or the
equivalent) with the positive pole ( )
1. Insert a small screwdriver into the slot
facing down.
and gently pry open the transmitter.

UN
LO
CK

Slot CK
LO

Back cover

2. Remove the battery.


CAUTION
Do not press any buttons when
replacing the battery. The electronic
code could be altered and cause the
keyless entry system to malfunction.
If the keyless entry system fails to
operate, contact an Authorised Mazda
Dealer.

4. Align the front and back covers and


snap the transmitter shut.

3-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Service
Door Locks
If you have a problem with the keyless
entry system, consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer. WARNING
If your transmitter is lost or stolen, bring Unattended Children and Pets:
all remaining transmitters to an Leaving a child or an animal
Authorised Mazda Dealer as soon as unattended in a parked vehicle is
possible for a replacement and to make dangerous. In hot weather,
the lost or stolen transmitter inoperative. temperatures inside a vehicle can
become high enough to cause brain
CAUTION damage or even death. Always take all
children and animals with you or
• Changes or modifications could leave a responsible person with them.
void your right to operate the
keyless entry system. Keys and Children:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
• Damage to your keyless entry
ignition key is dangerous. This could
system will affect the vehicle
result in someone being badly injured
warranty coverage.
or even killed. They could play with
power windows or other controls, or
even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in your vehicle with
children.

NOTE
Always remove the key from the
ignition switch, close all windows, and
lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended. This discourages
intruders and thieves.

3-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Locking, Unlocking with Key To lock any door with the door-lock
button from the outside, push down its
Either front door can be locked or door-lock button, hold the handle raised,
unlocked with a key. and close the door.
Turn the key toward the front to unlock,
toward the back to lock.

Door-lock button
Unlock

Lock

NOTE
▼ Locking, Unlocking with
Transmitter When locking the door this way:
• Be careful not to leave the key
The doors can be locked/unlocked by
inside the vehicle.
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to keyless entry system • The rear and front passenger doors
(page 3-3). (double-locking system-equipped
vehicles only) can be locked by
▼ Locking, Unlocking with Door- pushing down the door-lock buttons
and closing the doors (holding the
Lock Button
door handle raised is not required).
To lock any door from the inside, push
down its door-lock button.
To unlock, pull it up. NOTE
(All models except general right-
hand model)
Unlock The driver’s door on power door-lock
equipped vehicles can only be locked
from the outside using the key.

Lock

3-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Power Door Locks Locking, unlocking with door-lock


button
Locking, unlocking with key
All doors and the liftgate lock
All doors and the liftgate lock automatically when the driver’s door-lock
automatically when the driver’s door is button is pushed down. They all unlock
locked with the key. They all unlock when when the driver’s door-lock button is
the driver’s door is unlocked with the key. pulled up.

Unlock

Unlock

Lock
Lock

NOTE NOTE

If the front passenger door has a key (All models except general right-
cylinder, all doors and the liftgate can hand model)
be locked/unlocked automatically with If you try to lock the driver’s door-lock
the key. button when any door is open, the lock
button will unlock automatically.

3-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 9 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Rear Door Child Safety Locks


Liftgate
These locks are intended to help prevent
children from accidentally opening the
rear doors. Use them both whenever a WARNING
child rides in the vehicle.
Open Liftgate:
If you slide the child safety lock to the An open liftgate in a moving vehicle
lock position before closing that door, the will cause exhaust gas to be drawn
door cannot be opened from the inside. into the cabin. This gas contains CO
The door can be opened only by lifting the (carbon monoxide), which is
outside handle. colourless, odourless, and highly
poisonous, and it can cause loss of
Lock consciousness and death. Moreover,
an open liftgate could cause
occupants to fall out in accident. Do
Unlock not drive with the liftgate open.

▼ Locking, Unlocking with Key


To lock the liftgate with the key, insert the
key and turn it anticlockwise.

Lock Unlock

To unlock the liftgate with the key, insert


the key and turn it clockwise.

NOTE
(All models except general right-
hand model)
All doors simultaneously lock or
unlock when the liftgate is locked or
unlocked with the key.

3-9

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 10 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by ▼ Luggage Compartment


inserting the key into the driver’s door key
slot, refer to Power Door Locks (page 3-8).
▼ Locking, Unlocking with
WARNING
Transmitter Placing Cargo on the Cover:
The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by Placing luggage or other cargo on top
operating the keyless entry system of the luggage compartment cover is
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System dangerous. During sudden braking or
(page 3-3). a collision, the cargo could become a
projectile that could hit and injure
▼ Locking, Unlocking with Door- someone. Don’t place anything on top
Lock Button of the cover.
The liftgate can be locked/unlocked by
operating the driver’s door-lock button,
refer to Power Door Locks (page 3-8).
CAUTION
▼ Opening and Closing the Liftgate • Make sure the luggage
compartment cover is firmly
Opening the liftgate secured. If it is not firmly secured, it
Pull up on the handle. could unexpectedly disengage
resulting in injury.
• Before using the third-row seat,
remove the luggage compartment
cover and install the caps. Sitting in
the third-row seat without the caps
installed could result in injury if you
were to hit them.

Closing the liftgate


Use both hands to push the liftgate down
until the lock snaps shut. Do not slam it.
Pull up on the liftgate to make sure it is
secure.

3-10

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 11 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Luggage compartment cover 3. Depending on the rear seat recline


position or the quantity of luggage,
Installing the cover
insert the retractor bar into one of the
1. For 7-passenger vehicles, remove the three positions.
luggage compartment cover caps by
inserting a flathead screwdriver or
similar tool in the cover gap and gently
prying off.

4. Slowly pull out the cover and insert it


into the hooks.

2. Squeeze spring holders on both ends of


retractor bar inward.

Spring holders Removing the cover


Reverse the procedure for installation.

3-11

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 12 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Operating the Driver’s Side


Power Windows Power Window
The ignition switch must be in the ON To open the window, push down the
position for the power windows to switch.
operate. To close the window, pull up the switch.

Close
WARNING Left front window

Open
Closing Power Windows:
Closing power windows are
dangerous. A person’s hands, head,
or even neck could be caught by the
window and result in serious injury or
even death.
This warning applies especially to
children. Make sure the opening is
clear before closing a window.
Two-step down function
Children and Power Windows: With the window completely closed, press
Leaving the power window switches the switch lightly and the window will
unlocked while children are in the open and stop about 3 cm (1 in) from the
vehicle is dangerous. Power window top.
switches that are not locked with the If you continue to press and hold the
power window lock switch would switch, the window will resume opening
allow children to operate power all the way.
windows unintentionally which could
result in serious injury if a child’s
hands, head or neck becomes caught NOTE
by the window. Always lock all Pressing the power window switch
passenger power windows with the once when the window is fully closed
power window lock switch on the will only open it about 3 cm (1 in) to
driver’s side while children are in the allow convenient ventilation of the
vehicle, and never allow children to cabin.
play with power window switches.

CAUTION
To prevent burning out the fuse and
damaging the power window system,
don’t open or close more than two
windows at once.

3-12

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 13 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

Cancelling the two-step down function


NOTE
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position and complete the following • The two-step down function cannot
procedure within 5 seconds: be cancelled if the procedure is not
Press the power window switch two completed within the specified
times firmly, then pull it 2 times times, or the procedure is changed
firmly. along the way. To redo the
procedure, first turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position and
proceed from the beginning.
• If you are unable to cancel the
function despite doing the
cancellation procedure, consult an
Authorised Mazda Dealer.

Restoring the two-step down function


With the two-step down function in the
cancelled state, repeat the previous
procedure for cancelling the function and
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK it will be restored.
position.
3. With the ignition switch in the LOCK NOTE
position, and within 40 seconds, turn
the ignition switch to the ON position If you are unable to restore the
and complete the following procedure function despite doing the restore
within 5 seconds: procedure, consult an Authorised
Press the power window switch 2 Mazda Dealer.
times firmly, then pull two times
firmly. Auto-opening/closing
To fully open or close the window
automatically: Push the switch completely
down to open or pull it completely up to
close.

To stop the window partway, pull or push


the switch in the opposite direction and
then release it.
Jam-safe window
If a person’s hands, head or an object
blocks the window during the auto-
closing operation, the window will stop
and open halfway.

3-13

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 14 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Operating the Passenger Power


WARNING Windows
The power windows may be operated
Blocking the Driver’s Door Power when the power window lock switch on
Window: the driver’s door is in the unlocked
Blocking the driver’s side power position.
window just before it reaches the fully
closed position is dangerous. The passenger windows may be opened or
The jam-safe function cannot prevent closed by the power window master
the window from stopping just before control switches on the driver’s door.
it reaches the fully closed position. If
fingers are caught, serious injuries
could occur. Make sure nothing Left rear window
blocks the window just before it
reaches the fully closed position.

NOTE
Depending on driving conditions, a Right front window
closing power window could stop and
start opening when the window feels a Right rear window
shock that is similar to something
blocking it. To open the window, push down the
switch.
Engine-off power window operation To close the window, pull up the switch.

The power window can be operated about


40 seconds after the ignition switch is Close
turned from the ON position to the ACC
or LOCK position with all doors closed. If
any door is opened, the power window
will be inoperable.
Open
NOTE
• For engine-off operation of the
power window, the switch must be
held up firmly throughout window
closure because the auto-closing
function will be inoperable.
• The two-step down function is
inoperable during engine-off
operation.

3-14

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 15 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Power Window Lock Switch


Fuel-Filler Flap and Cap
With the lock switch in the unlocked
position, all power windows on each door
can be operated.
WARNING
With the lock switch in the locked
position, only the driver’s side power Fuel Spray:
window can be operated. Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can
burn skin and eyes and cause illness
when ingested. Fuel spray is released
Locked position when there is pressure in the fuel
tank and the fuel cap is removed too
quickly. When removing the fuel cap,
loosen the cap slightly and wait for
any hissing to stop. Then remove it.
Unlocked position
Fuel Vapour:
Fuel vapour is dangerous. It could be
ignited by sparks or flames causing
serious burns and injuries. Before
refueling, stop the engine, and always
keep sparks and flames away from the
WARNING filler neck.

Unintentional Window Operation:


Unintentional window operation is CAUTION
dangerous. A person’s hands, head,
or neck could be caught by the Always use only a designated Mazda
window and result in serious injury. fuel cap or an approved equivalent,
Unless a passenger needs to operate a available at Authorised Mazda
window, keep the power window lock Dealers. The wrong cap can result in a
switch in the locked position. serious malfunction of the fuel and
emission control systems.

3-15

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 16 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Fuel-Filler Flap
Bonnet
To open, pull up the remote fuel-filler flap
release. ▼ Opening the Bonnet
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the
release handle to unlock the bonnet.

Remote fuel-filler
flap release

▼ Fuel-Filler Cap
To remove the filler cap, turn it
anticlockwise. 2. Pull the safety catch up and lift the
bonnet.
To replace the filler cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks.

Open

Close

3-16

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 17 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

3. Use the support rod to hold the bonnet


open. Sunroof
The sunroof can be opened or closed
electrically only when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.

Slide switch

Clip Support rod

▼ Closing the Bonnet Tilt switch

1. Check under the bonnet area to make


certain all filler caps are in place and
all loose items (e.g. tools, oil
containers, etc.) have been removed. WARNING
2. Secure the rod in its clip.
Extending the Head or Arms
3. Close the bonnet so that it locks Through the Sunroof:
securely. Extending the head, arms, or other
parts of the body through the sunroof
is dangerous. The head or arms could
hit something while the vehicle is
moving. This could cause death or
serious injury. Don’t let passengers
stand up or extend anything through
the open sunroof while the vehicle is
moving.

Closing the Sunroof:


A closing sunroof is dangerous. The
hands, head, or even neck of a person
—especially a child— could be
caught in it as it closes, causing
serious injury or even death. Make
sure the opening is clear before
closing the sunroof.

3-17

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 18 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Slide Operation
NOTE
To open to any position, press the rear of
After washing your Mazda or after a the slide switch.
rain, wipe the water off the sunroof
before operating it. To close, press the front of the slide
switch.
▼ Tilt Operation
The rear of the sunroof can be tilted open
to provide more ventilation.

To tilt, push the rear of the tilt switch.

To close, push the front of the tilt switch.


Open

Close

NOTE
Tilt up • The sunroof automatically stops
approximately 5 cm (2 in) short of
Close fully opening to reduce wind noise.
To fully open, release the switch
and press it again.
• For safety reasons, the sunroof stops
moving approximately 20 cm (8 in)
prior to completely closing. After
you are sure it is unobstructed,
resume closing the sunroof by
pressing the switch again.

3-18

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 19 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Doors and Locks

▼ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed
by hand.

The sunshade opens automatically when


the sunroof is opened, but must be closed
by hand.

Sunshade

CAUTION
The sunshade doesn’t tilt. To avoid
damaging the sunshade, don’t push up
on it.

3-19

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 20 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

Immobilizer System NOTE

The optional immobilizer system allows • If the warning light comes on and
the engine to start only with a key the stays on when the ignition switch is
system recognizes. turned to the ON position, the
engine will not start.
If someone attempts to start the engine • Signals from a TV or radio station,
with an unrecognized key, the engine will or from a transceiver or a mobile
not start, thereby helping to prevent the telephone, could interfere with your
theft of your vehicle. immobilizer system. If you are
using the proper key and your
CAUTION engine fails to start, check the
warning light. If it is flashing,
Changes or modifications not remove the ignition key and wait 2
expressly approved by Mazda could seconds or more, then reinsert it and
void the user’s authority to operate the try starting the engine again. If it
equipment. doesn’t start after 3 or more tries,
contact an Authorised Mazda
▼ Immobilizer System Warning Dealer.
Light • If the warning light flashes
continuously while you are driving,
don’t shut off the engine. Go to an
Authorised Mazda Dealer and have
it checked. If you shut off the
engine while the light is flashing
you won’t be able to restart it.

If the immobilizer system is working


properly, the light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or
START position. The light will go out
when confirmation by the immobilizer
system is completed.

If the light flashes rapidly, fails to come


on, or comes on and stays on, it indicates
a system malfunction. If any of these
occur, contact an Authorised Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.

3-20

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 21 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

▼ Maintenance
NOTE
If you have a problem with the
immobilizer system or the key, consult an • The keys carry a unique electronic
Authorised Mazda Dealer. code. For this reason, and to assure
your safety, replacement keys
require some waiting time to obtain.
CAUTION They are only available through an
Authorised Mazda Dealer.
• To avoid damage to the key, do not:
• Always keep a replacement key, in
• Drop the key.
case one is lost. If a key is lost,
• Get the key wet.
contact an Authorised Mazda
• Expose the key to any kind of
Dealer as soon as possible.
magnetic field.
• Expose the key to high • If you lose a key, an Authorised
temperatures on places such as Mazda Dealer will reset the
the instrument panel or bonnet, electronic codes of your remaining
under direct sunlight. keys and immobilizer system.
• When starting the engine, do not let Starting the vehicle with a key that
the following materials touch the has not been reset is not possible.
key grip. The engine may not start:
▼ Modification and Add-On
• Spare keys. Equipment
• Keys for other vehicles equipped
with an immobilizer system. Mazda cannot guarantee the system’s
• Metal objects that touch or pass operation if the system has been modified
through the hole in the key. or if any add-on equipment has been
• Devices for electronic purchases, installed to it.
and security passage.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to it.

3-21

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 22 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

▼ How to Arm the System


Theft-Deterrent System
1. Remove the key from the ignition
The optional theft-deterrent system is switch.
designed to prevent your vehicle or its
2. Close the bonnet. Then close all doors
contents from being stolen when all the
doors, bonnet, and liftgate are locked. and the liftgate and lock them from the
outside using the key in the door or the
liftgate. If you have the keyless entry
If forcible entry is attempted, the system
sounds the horn and flashes the hazard system, press the LOCK button on the
transmitter. The hazard warning lights
warning lights.
will flash one time to indicate that the
system is armed.
NOTE
3. The indicator light flashes once every 3
The theft-deterrent system operates seconds to indicate that the system is
without the keyless entry system fully armed. It continues to flash until
transmitter, as well. the theft-deterrent system is turned off.

The system won’t function unless it’s


properly armed. So when you leave the
vehicle, lock all the doors and the liftgate,
close all the windows, take your key, your
transmitter, and make sure the security
indicator light is flashing.
▼ Operation
▼ To Turn off an Armed System
What turns it on:
An armed system can be turned off by any
• Forcing open a door, the bonnet or the one of the following methods:
liftgate.
• Unlock a door or the liftgate with the
• Opening a door or the bonnet by key.
operating an inside door-lock button or
• Press the UNLOCK button on the
the bonnet release handle.
keyless entry system transmitter.
What it does: • Insert the key into the ignition switch
• The horn sounds intermittently for and turn it to the ON position.
about 25 seconds and the hazard
warning lights flash for about 5
minutes.
If the system is triggered again after the
horn stops sounding, the hazard warning
lights and horn will activate until a door or
the liftgate is unlocked with the key or
with the transmitter.

3-22

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 23 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

▼ To Stop an Alarm ▼ Theft-Deterrent Labels


A triggered alarm can be turned off by any
one of the following methods:
• Unlock a door or the liftgate with the
key.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the
keyless entry system transmitter.

NOTE
If you have any problem with the theft-
deterrent system, consult an
Authorised Mazda Dealer. Labels indicating that your vehicle is
equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System
▼ Modification and Add-On are in the glove box.
Equipment
Mazda cannot guarantee the system’s Mazda recommends that you affix them to
operation if the system has been modified the lower rear corner of the front door
or if any add-on equipment has been windows.
installed to it.

CAUTION
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to it.

3-23

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 24 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

3. Insert the key in a door or the liftgate,


Double Locking System turn the key to the lock position, and
return it to the centre position. Then
The optional double locking system is turn it to the lock position again within
designed to prevent someone who has 3 seconds.
broken into your vehicle from opening the
door from the inside. Front doors

WARNING
Activating the System with
Passengers Inside: Centre
Activating the system with position
passengers, especially children, still
inside the vehicle is dangerous. The Lock
passengers cannot open the doors position
from inside. They would be trapped
and subjected to extreme
temperatures. This could result in Liftgate
serious injuries or even death. Never
activate the system with passengers,
especially children, still inside the
vehicle.
Centre
position
▼ How to Activate the System
1. Remove the key from the ignition
switch, and if your vehicle has a Lock
keyless entry system, take the position
transmitter with you.
(With keyless entry system)
2. Close all the windows, doors and You can also activate the system by
liftgate. pressing the LOCK button twice within 3
seconds.

3-24

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 25 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Security System

4. The indicator light comes on for about


3 seconds to indicate that the system
has been activated.

NOTE
The system cannot be activated when
any door or the liftgate is open.

▼ How to Deactivate the System


Unlock a door or the liftgate with the key
or the transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.

NOTE
• If the power supply is interrupted
(fuse blows or the battery is
disconnected), the system can only
be deactivated by unlocking a door
with the key.
• If you have any problems with the
double locking system, consult an
Authorised Mazda Dealer.

3-25

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 26 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Steering Wheel and Mirrors

Steering Wheel Mirrors


▼ Outside Mirrors
WARNING Check the mirrors’ angles before driving.
Adjusting the Steering Wheel:
Adjusting the steering wheel while the WARNING
vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Moving it can very easily cause the Convex Mirrors:
driver to abruptly turn to the left or Changing lanes without taking into
right. This can lead to loss of control account the actual distance of the
or an accident. Never adjust the vehicle in the convex mirror is
steering wheel while the vehicle is dangerous. You could have a serious
moving. accident. What you see in the convex
mirror is closer than it appears. Be
▼ Tilt Steering Wheel sure to look over your shoulder or to
check your inside mirror before
To change the angle of the steering wheel, changing lanes.
stop the vehicle, pull the tilt wheel release
lever under the steering column down,
adjust the wheel, then push the release
lever up to lock the column.

Tilt wheel release


lever

After adjusting, push the wheel up and


down to be certain it’s locked before
driving.

3-26

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 27 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Steering Wheel and Mirrors

2. Depress the perimeter switch in the


NOTE appropriate direction.
(Driver’s Side Wide Angle Mirror)
Selector switch
• The wide angle mirror has two
curvatures on it’s surface separated Outside mirror
by a region line into outer and inner
regions. The inner region is a
standard convex mirror whereas the
Perimeter switch
outer region allows for a wider
range of visibility within the same
sweep. This combination allows for
better assurance when making lane
changes.

After adjusting the mirror, lock the


control by moving the selector switch to
the middle position.
Manual folding mirror
Fold the outside mirror rearward until it is
flush with the vehicle.

Region line

• The perceived distance of objects in


the outer and inner regions of the
wide angle mirror is different.
Objects appearing in the outer
region are actually further away
than they are in the inner region.

Power control mirror


The ignition switch must be in the ACC or
ON position.

To adjust:

1. Move the selector switch to the left or


right to choose the mirror.

3-27

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 28 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Steering Wheel and Mirrors

WARNING WARNING
Driving with Mirrors Folded In: Driving with Mirrors Folded In:
Driving with the outside mirrors Driving with the outside mirrors
folded in is dangerous. Your rear view folded in is dangerous. Your rear view
will be restricted, and you could have will be restricted, and you could have
an accident. Always return the an accident. Always return the
outside mirrors to the driving position outside mirrors to the driving position
before you start driving. before you start driving.

Power folding mirror Touching the Moving Power Fold-in


Mirror:
The ignition switch must be in the ACC or Touching the power fold-in mirror
ON position. when it’s moving is dangerous. Your
hand could be pinched and injured or
To fold, press the switch. the mirror could be damaged. Do not
To return the mirror to the driving touch the power fold-in mirror when
position, press the switch again. it is moving.

Setting the Power Fold-in Mirror to


On-road Position by Hand:
Setting the power fold-in mirror to the
on-road position by hand is
dangerous. The mirror will not lock
in position and will prevent effective
rearview visibility. Although the
power fold-in mirror can be folded-in
by hand, use the power fold-in switch
to set the mirror to the on-road
position.

Operating the Power Fold-in Mirror


While the Vehicle is Moving:
Operating the power fold-in mirror
while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. Wind blast on the mirror
will cause them to collapse and you
will be unable to return it to the on-
road position, preventing rearview
visibility. Only operate the power fold-
in mirror with the vehicle safely
parked.

3-28

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 29 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Knowing Your Mazda

Steering Wheel and Mirrors

Mirror defroster
To turn on the mirror defrosters, turn the
ignition on and push the rear window
defroster switch (page 5-43).
▼ Rearview Mirror (With
Antidazzle Function)
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror
to centre on the scene through the rear
window. Do this with the antidazzle lever
in the day position.

Push the lever forward for day driving.


Pull it back to reduce glare from
headlights.

Antidazzle lever

Day
Night

WARNING
Blocked View:
Cargo stacked higher than the
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block
your view in the rearview mirror,
which might cause you to hit another
car when changing lanes. Don’t stack
things higher than the seatbacks.

3-29

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 30 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

3-30

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

4 Before Driving Your Mazda

Important information about driving your Mazda.

Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions ....................................... 4- 2


Fuel Requirements (Petrol Engine) ......................................... 4- 2
Fuel Requirements (Diesel Engine) ....................................... 4- 3
Emission Control System (Petrol Engine) ............................... 4- 4
Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide) ....................................... 4- 5

Before Starting the Engine ......................................................... 4- 6


Before Getting In ..................................................................... 4- 6
After Getting In ....................................................................... 4- 6

Driving Tips ................................................................................. 4- 7


Running-In ............................................................................... 4- 7
Money-Saving Suggestions ..................................................... 4- 7
Hazardous Driving ................................................................... 4- 8
Rocking the Vehicle ................................................................. 4- 8
Winter Driving ......................................................................... 4- 9
Driving In Flooded Area ......................................................... 4-11
Turbocharger Information (Diesel Engine) ............................. 4-12

Towing .......................................................................................... 4-13


Towing Caravan and Trailers (Europe) .................................... 4-13
Towing Caravan and Trailers (Australia) ................................ 4-18

4-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions

Fuel Requirements (Petrol Engine)


Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.

Fuel with a lower rating could cause the emission control system to lose effectiveness. It
could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.

Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.

Fuel Research Octane Number Country


95 or above Except Australia and New Zealand
Premium unleaded fuel
(confirming to DIN 51 607)*1 Australia and New Zealand (FS engine only)
Regular unleaded fuel 90 or above Australia and New Zealand (FP engine only)
*1
Europe

CAUTION
• USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter or the oxygen sensor. The lead will
accumulate on the oxygen sensor and the catalyst inside the converter. This will result
in a malfunction of the emission control system, causing poor performance.
• Never add fuel system additives. Never add cleaning agents other than those specified
by Mazda. Other cleaning agents and additives may damage the system. Consult an
Authorised Mazda Dealer.

4-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions

Fuel Requirements (Diesel Engine)


When the engine is adjusted to factory specifications, your Mazda will operate efficiently
on diesel fuel with a cetane number of 51 or above.

CAUTION
• Never use fuel other than what is specified for your vehicle. Use of petrol or paraffin
in diesel engines will result in engine damage.
• Never add fuel system additives or cleaning agents. These may damage the system.

4-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions

Emission Control System (Petrol Engine)


Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is part of
this system) that enables your vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions
requirements.

WARNING
Parking Over Things That Burn:
Parking over or near anything inflammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even
with the engine turned off, the exhaust system could ignite it because the exhaust
system gets very hot during normal use. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or
death. Never park over or near anything inflammable.

CAUTION
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst inside
the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will damage the
converter and cause poor performance.
• USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
• Don’t drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.
• Don’t coast with the ignition switch turned off.
• Don’t descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switch turned off.
• Don’t operate the engine at high idle for more than 5 minutes.
• Don’t tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must
be made by a qualified technician.
• Don’t try to push-start or pull-start your vehicle.

4-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions

Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide)

WARNING
Carbon Monoxide:
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colourless, odourless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of
consciousness and death. If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle, keep all
windows fully open and contact an Authorised Mazda Dealer immediately.

Exhaust Gas in Enclosed Area:


Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss of
consciousness or even death could occur. Don’t run the engine when inside an
enclosed area.

Idling with the Windows Closed:


Exhaust gas is dangerous. When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closed and
the engine running for a long time in an open area, exhaust gas, which contains
poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or even
death could occur. Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw
fresh air.

Snow Blocking the Exhaust Gas:


Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The exhaust
pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin. Because
exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, anyone in the cabin could be
injured or killed. Clear the snow from underneath and around your vehicle before
starting the engine.

4-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Before Starting the Engine

Before Getting In After Getting In


• Be sure the windows, outside mirror(s), • Are all doors closed?
and outside lights are clean.
• Are the inside and outside mirrors
• Inspect inflation pressures and adjusted?
condition of tyres.
• Is everyone’s seat belt fastened?
• Look under the vehicle for any sign of
• Do all the lights work?
a leak.
• Check all gauges.
• If you plan to back up, make sure
nothing will be in your way. • Check all warning lights when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
NOTE
• Release the parking brake and make
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake/ sure the brake warning light goes off.
clutch fluid, washer fluid, and other
Always be thoroughly familiar with your
fluid levels should be inspected daily,
Mazda.
weekly, or at refuelling, depending on
the fluid. See Maintenance, Section 8.

4-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Driving Tips

Running-In Money-Saving Suggestions


No special running-in is necessary, but a How you operate your Mazda determines
few precautions in the first 1,000 km (600 how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use
miles) may add to the performance, these suggestions to help save money on
economy, and life of your Mazda. fuel and repairs.
• Don’t race the engine. • Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine
runs smoothly, begin driving.
• Don’t maintain one constant speed for
long. • Avoid fast starts.
• Don’t drive constantly at full-throttle or • Keep the engine tuned. Follow the
high engine rpm for extended periods maintenance schedule (page 8-3) and
of time. have an Authorised Mazda Dealer
perform inspections and servicing.
• Avoid unnecessary hard stops.
• Use the air conditioner only when
• Avoid full-throttle starts.
necessary.
• Don’t tow a trailer.
• Slow down on rough roads.
• Keep the tyres properly inflated.
• Don’t carry unnecessary weight.
• Don’t rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
• Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
• Keep windows closed at high speeds.
• Slow down when driving in crosswinds
and headwinds.

WARNING
Coasting:
Turning off the engine to coast down
a hill is dangerous. This causes the
loss of power steering and power
brake control. Any loss of steering or
braking control could cause an
accident. Never turn off the engine
and coast down a hill.

4-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Driving Tips

Hazardous Driving Rocking the Vehicle

WARNING WARNING
Downshifting on Slippery Surfaces: Spinning the Wheels:
Downshifting into lower gear while When the vehicle is stuck, spinning
driving on slippery surfaces is the wheels at high speed is dangerous.
dangerous. The sudden change in The spinning tyre could overheat and
tyre speed could cause the tyres to explode. This could cause serious
skid. This could lead to loss of vehicle injuries. Don’t spin the wheels at high
control and an accident. If it is speed, and don’t allow anyone to
necessary to downshift on slippery stand behind a wheel when pushing
surfaces, be very careful. the vehicle.

When driving on ice or in water, snow,


mud, sand, or similar hazard: CAUTION
• Be cautious and allow extra distance Too much rocking may cause engine
for braking. overheating, transaxle failure, and tyre
• Avoid sudden braking and quick damage.
steering.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
• If your vehicle is not equipped with
snow, sand, or mud, depress the
ABS, brake with the pedal by using a
accelerator slightly and slowly move the
light up-down motion. Don’t hold the
shift lever from 1 (D) to R.
pedal down constantly.
If your vehicle is equipped with ABS,
don’t pump the brakes. Continue to
press down on the brake pedal.
• If you get stuck, shift to 1 (L) or 2 (S)
and accelerate slowly. Don’t spin the
front wheels.
• For more traction in starting, use sand,
rock salt, chains, carpeting, or other
nonslip material under the front
wheels.

NOTE
Use snow chains only on the front
wheels.

4-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 9 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Driving Tips

Winter Driving CAUTION


• Carry emergency gear, including tyre Check local regulations before using
chains, window scraper, flares, a small studded tyres.
shovel, jumper leads, and a small bag
of sand or salt. Use snow tyres on all four wheels
Ask a Mazda dealer to perform the Europe
following precautions:
Use snow tyres of specified size and
• Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in construction (page 10-9).
the radiator.
• Inspect the battery and its leads. Cold Please also note the inflation pressure
reduces battery capacity. recommended by the tyre-maker or from
the specifications.
• Use only cold-weather engine oil (page
8-14). Except Europe
• Inspect the ignition system for damage Don’t go faster than 160 km/h (100 mph).
and loose connections. Inflate snow tyres 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2,
4.3 psi) more than recommended on the
• Use washer fluid made with
tyre pressure label (driver’s door), but
antifreeze—but don’t use engine
never more than the maximum cold-tyre
coolant antifreeze for washer fluid
pressure shown on the tyres.
(page 8-23).
• Don’t use the parking brake in freezing
weather as the parking brake may
freeze. Instead, shift to P with an
automatic transaxle and to 1 or R with
a manual transaxle. Block the rear
wheels.
▼ Snow Tyres

WARNING
Mixing Tyre Types:
Using tyres different in size or type is
dangerous. Your vehicle’s handling
could be greatly affected and result in
an accident. Use only the same size
and type tyres (snow, radial, or non-
radial) on all four wheels.

4-9

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 10 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Driving Tips

▼ Tyre Chains Tyre chain selection (Europe)


Mazda recommends ladder type or
CAUTION hexagon type steel ring chains. Select the
proper type according to your tyre size.
• Chains may scratch or chip
aluminium wheels. Install tyre Ladder type Hexagon type
chains on steel wheels only.
• Chains may affect handling.
• Don’t go faster than 50 km/h (30
mph) or the chain manufacturer’s
recommended limit, whichever is
lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, and sharp turns.
• Avoid locked-wheel braking.
Tyre and rim size Tyre chain
• Don’t use chains on the temporary
185/65R14 Ladder type
tyre; it may result in damage to the 195/55R15
vehicle and to the tyre. 195/60R15 Hexagon type
• Don’t use chains on roads that are 195/50R16
free of snow or ice. The tyres and
chains could be damaged. NOTE

Check local regulations before using tyre Although Mazda recommends ladder
chains. type or hexagon type steel ring chains,
Install the chains on the front tyres. all chains within installation
Don’t use chains on the rear tyres. specification may be used.

Installation specification (Europe)

A
B

Tyre

Side view Cross section view

4-10

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 11 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Driving Tips

When installing tyre chains, the distance


between the tyre tread and the chain must Driving In Flooded Area
be within the prescribed limits in the
following table.
WARNING
Tyre and Distance [Unit: mm (inch) ]
rim size A B Driving with Wet Brakes:
185/65R14
MAX 16.0 MAX 24.0 Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
(0.63) (0.94) Increased stopping distance or the
195/55R15 vehicle pulling to one side when
MAX 14.0 MAX 14.0
195/60R15
195/50R16
(0.55) (0.55) braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
Installing the chains whether the brakes have been
1. Remove the wheel covers, or the chain affected. Dry the brakes by driving
bands will scratch them. very slowly and applying the brakes
lightly until brake performance
2. Secure the chains on the front tyres as returns to normal.
tightly as possible. Always follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Retighten the chains after driving CAUTION
1/2—1 km (1/4—1/2 mile).
Make sure water does not enter the
vehicle interior or the engine area. The
vehicle interior could become wet or
the engine could be damaged.

4-11

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 12 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Driving Tips

Turbocharger Information (Diesel Engine)

CAUTION
• After driving at freeway speeds or up a long hill, idle the engine at least 30 seconds
before stopping it. Otherwise, the turbocharger could be damaged.
• Racing or overreving the engine, particularly after it’s just been started, can damage
the turbocharger.
• To protect the engine from damage, the engine is designed so that it cannot be raced
just after starting the engine in extremely cold weather.

Mazda’s turbocharger greatly enhances engine power. Its advanced design provides better
operation and requires minimum maintenance.

To get the most from it, observe the following.


1. Change engine oil and filter according to Scheduled Maintenance (page 8-3).
2. Use only recommended engine oil (page 8-14). Extra additives are NOT recommended.

4-12

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 13 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Towing

Towing Caravan and Trailers (Europe)


Your Mazda was designed and built primarily to carry passengers and cargo.
If you must tow a trailer, follow these instructions because driver and passenger safety
depends on proper equipment and safe driving habits. Towing a trailer will affect handling,
braking, durability, performance, and economy.
Never overload vehicle or trailer. Consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer if you need further
details.

CAUTION
Don’t tow a trailer during the first 1,000 km (600 miles) of your new Mazda. If you do,
you may damage the engine, transaxle, differential, wheel bearings, and other power
train components.

▼ Weight Limits
The total trailer weight, gross combined weight and trailer nose weight must be
within the prescribed limits in the Trailer Towing-Load Table.

In a high-altitude operating environment, the engine loses power as elevation increases. In


these conditions, a reduction of 10% per 1,000 m (3,280 ft) in total trailer weight and gross
combined weight is recommended.

4-13

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 14 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Towing

TRAILER TOWING-LOAD TABLE


Because vehicle weights vary, adjustments must be made to meet the requirements in
this table.
Unit: kg (lb)
TOTAL TRAILER WEIGHT GROSS COMBINED TRAILER NOSE
(MAX) WEIGHT (MAX) WEIGHT (MAX)
Item

Model Trailer Trailer with


without brake brake
FP engine 400 (882) 1,300 (2,866) 2,970 (6,548) 75 (165)
Petrol
FS MTX 400 (882) 1,300 (2,866) 3,095 (6,823) 75 (165)
engine
engine ATX 400 (882) 1,300 (2,866) 2,965 (6,537) 75 (165)
Diesel engine 500 (1,102) 1,400 (3,086) 3,095 (6,823) 75 (165)
TOTAL TRAILER WEIGHT: Sum of weights of the trailer and its load.
GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT: Sum of total trailer weight and towing vehicle weight;
including trailer hitch, vehicle passengers, and vehicle load.
TRAILER NOSE WEIGHT: The weight exerted on the trailer tongue. It is varied by
changing the weight distribution when loading the trailer.
MTX: Manual transaxle
ATX: Automatic transaxle

WARNING
Tow Loads:
Attempting to tow loads greater than those specified is dangerous as it may cause
serious handling and performance problems that could result in personal injury or
vehicle damage, or both. Always keep tow loads within specified limits in the Trailer
Towing-Load Table.

Trailer Loading:
Loading the trailer with more weight in the rear than in the front is dangerous. This
could cause loss of vehicle control and an accident. Always keep the trailer nose
weight within the specified limits in the Trailer Towing-Load Table.

NOTE
The total trailer weight and nose weight can be determined by weighing the trailer on
platform scales at a highway weighing station or a trucking company to prevent the
danger of trailer sway from crosswinds, rough roads, or other causes.

4-14

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 15 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Towing

▼ Trailer Hitch
When towing a trailer, use a genuine Mazda trailer hitch. Bolt holes for securing the trailer
hitch must be drilled. Contact your Authorised Mazda Dealer for more information.

Trailer hitch installation area

Unit:mm(in)
A:350~420 (13.8~16.5)
C B:880 (34.6)
C:1060 (41.7)

MAX 75 kg (165 lb)

Hitch coupling point

B C

▼ Tyres
When towing a trailer, make sure all tyres are inflated to the recommended cold-tyre
pressure, as indicated on the tyre pressure chart on the driver’s door. Trailer tyre size, load
rating, and inflation pressures should conform to tyre manufacturer specifications.

WARNING
Using a Temporary Spare Tyre when Towing:
Using a temporary spare tyre on your vehicle when towing a trailer is dangerous as it
could result in tyre failure, loss of control, and injury to vehicle occupants. Never use
a temporary spare when towing.

4-15

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 16 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Towing

▼ Safety Chains
Safety chains must be used as a precautionary measure should the trailer become
unintentionally unhitched. They should cross under the trailer tongue and attach to the
hitch. Leave enough slack to allow full turns. Consult literature published by your trailer or
hitch manufacturer for more details.

WARNING
Towing Without Safety Chain:
Towing a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer and
the vehicle is dangerous. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, the
trailer could wander into another lane and cause a collision. Make sure the safety
chain is securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle prior to departure.

▼ Trailer Lights

CAUTION
Don’t connect a trailer lighting system directly to the lighting system of your Mazda.
This may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and lighting systems. To connect the
lighting system, consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

▼ Trailer Brakes
If the total trailer weight exceeds *1400kg (882lb), *2500kg (1,102lb) trailer brakes are
required.

If your trailer has brakes, make sure they meet regulations.


*1: Petrol engine
*2
: Diesel engine

WARNING
Hydraulic Trailer-Brake System:
Connecting a hydraulic trailer-brake system directly to the vehicle brake system is
dangerous and will result in inadequate braking and possible injury. Don’t connect a
hydraulic trailer-brake system to your vehicle’s brake system.

4-16

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 17 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Towing

▼ Trailer Towing Tips


Before driving
• Verify that your Mazda maintains a near-normal attitude when a loaded or unloaded
trailer is connected. Don’t drive if it has an abnormal front-up or front-down position.
Inspect for incorrect nose weight, worn suspension parts, and trailer overloading. Have
the vehicle inspected by an Authorised Mazda Dealer.
• Make sure the trailer cargo is secure to prevent it from shifting.
• Make sure the mirrors meet all government regulations. Inspect them.
• Before starting out, inspect the operation of all vehicle and trailer lights and all vehicle-
to-trailer connections. Stop and re-inspect all lights and connections after driving a short
distance.
Driving
• Your Mazda will handle differently with a trailer in tow, so practice turning, backing,
and stopping in a traffic-free area.
• Take time to get accustomed to the extra weight and length.
• Do not exceed 100 km/h (62 mph) with a trailer in tow. If the local legal maximum
speed with a trailer in tow is less than 100 km/h (62 mph), do not exceed the legal speed.

CAUTION
If the vehicle exceeds 100 km/h (62 mph) with a trailer in tow, the vehicle could be
damaged.

• When ascending a hill, shift into a lower gear to reduce the possibility of overloading or
overheating the engine, or both.
• When descending a hill, shift into a lower gear and use engine compression as a braking
effect. Pay constant attention to speed and use the brakes only as needed. Holding the
brake pedal down for a prolonged period may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
power.

4-17

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 18 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Towing

Towing Caravan and Trailers (Australia)


A Mazda-approved towing package used properly will not invalidate your vehicle
warranty. This means you must not overload your Mazda or the vehicle being towed, and
you must follow all other instructions for tow-bar and vehicle use.
▼ Load Limits
The load in a towed vehicle must not exceed the following:
Trailer with brakes 1,300 kg (2,866 lb)
Trailer without brakes 400 kg (882 lb)

The downward load on the tow ball must not exceed 10 % of the total load in tow.

When the total towed weight exceeds 600 kg (1,322 lb), use a Mazda approved load
levelling device in combination with an appropriate tow bar to accommodate a tow ball
down load of up to 10 % of the maximum towing load limit.
▼ Towing Instructions
Your Mazda is designed primarily as a passenger vehicle; handling, durability, and
economy may be affected by towing.
Always use correct equipment and make sure it fits.

Your Authorised Mazda Dealer will supply and properly install the towing equipment you
need.

Follow these instructions to make your towing as safe and efficient as possible.
• Use only a Mazda-approved tow bar.
Don’t use a bumper hitch.
• Never exceed recommended load limits.
• Before towing, inflate all tyres to the maximum recommended pressures.
You’ll find these pressures on the edge of the driver’s door.
• When on a hill, always use a lower gear, whether your transaxle is manual or automatic.
This helps maintain speed. It also prevents engine and transaxle overloading on
upgrades and reduces the need for braking on downgrades.
• Always allow a greater stopping distance than normal to prevent excessive braking, and
avoid sudden stops that could cause loss of control.
• Frequently inspect oil and fluid levels.
• Because of the extra stress on your Mazda from towing, more frequent maintenance
than usual is necessary.

4-18

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 19 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Before Driving Your Mazda

Towing

• Break in your new Mazda and have it serviced at 1,000 km (600 miles) before using it
for towing. If you must tow before this, don’t exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).
• Your Mazda’s behavior changes while towing. Get accustomed to these changes over a
short and safe trial distance before starting a long trip.
• Headlights may need re-aiming after a towed vehicle has been attached, especially if a
load equalizing hitch is not used.
• The airflow to the radiator must not be restricted in any way.
• Make sure the towed vehicle complies with all local regulations, especially in regard to
lighting, mirrors, and safety chains. The tow bar should not obscure the rear license
plate.
• Whenever you remove the tow bar, seal all mounting holes in the underbody to prevent
the entry of exhaust fumes, dust, and water.

4-19

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 20 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

4-20

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

5 Driving Your Mazda

Explanation of instruments and controls.

Starting and Driving ................................................................... 5- 2


Ignition Switch ........................................................................ 5- 2
Starting the Engine .................................................................. 5- 3
Brake System ........................................................................... 5- 5
Manual Transaxle Operation ................................................... 5-10
Automatic Transaxle Controls ................................................. 5-11
Power Steering ......................................................................... 5-16
Traction Control System (TCS) ............................................... 5-16
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) ........................................... 5-18

Instrument Cluster and Indicators ............................................ 5-20


Meters and Gauges .................................................................. 5-20

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps ........................................ 5-27


Warning/Indicator Lights ......................................................... 5-27
Beeps ....................................................................................... 5-37

Switches and Controls ................................................................. 5-38


Lighting Control ...................................................................... 5-38
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ............................................... 5-39
Front Fog Lights ...................................................................... 5-40
Rear Fog Light ......................................................................... 5-40
Windscreen Wipers and Washer .............................................. 5-41
Rear Window Wiper and Washer ............................................ 5-42
Headlight Washer .................................................................... 5-43
Rear Window Defroster ........................................................... 5-43
Horn ......................................................................................... 5-44
Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................................... 5-45

5-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Ignition Switch WARNING


▼ Ignition Switch Positions
Removing the Key:
It’s dangerous to remove the key from
the ignition switch while the vehicle is
moving. Removing the key allows the
steering wheel to lock. You will lose
steering control and a serious
accident could occur.
Remove the key only when the vehicle
is parked.

Not Setting the Parking Brake:


Leaving the driver’s seat without
setting the parking brake is
LOCK dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur if the parking
The steering wheel locks to protect brake is not set. This could cause an
against theft. Only in this position can the accident. Before leaving the driver’s
key be removed. seat, always set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is in P with
an automatic transaxle or in 1 or R
with a manual transaxle.

NOTE
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the
steering wheel from side to side.

ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel unlocks and some
electrical accessories will operate.
ON
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. The warning lights
should be inspected before the engine is
started (page 5-27).

5-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

START
Starting the Engine
The engine is started in this position. It
will crank until you release the key; then Petrol engine
it returns to the ON position.
1. Occupants should fasten their seat
▼ Ignition Key Reminder belts.
(Except European model) 2. Make sure the parking brake is on.
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or 3. Depress the brake pedal.
ACC position, a beep will sound when
any door is opened. 4. (Manual transaxle)
Depress the clutch pedal all the way
and shift into neutral.
Keep the pedal depressed while
cranking the engine.

(Automatic transaxle)
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).

NOTE
The starter will not operate if the shift
lever is not in P or N.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the START


position and hold (up to 10 seconds at a
time) until the engine starts.

CAUTION
Don’t try the starter for more than 10
seconds at a time. If the engine stalls or
fails to start, wait 10 seconds before
trying again. Otherwise, you may
damage the starter and drain the
battery.

6. After starting the engine, let it idle for


about 10 seconds (prohibited in
Germany).

5-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

6. Turn the ignition switch to the START


NOTE position and hold it there without
• In extremely cold weather, below depressing the accelerator until the
−18°C (0°F), or after the vehicle has engine starts.
stood idle several days, let the If the engine fails to start, turn the
engine warm up without operating ignition switch to the LOCK or ACC
the accelerator (prohibited in position, then try again.
Germany).
• Whether cold or warm, the engine CAUTION
should be started without use of the Don’t try the starter for more than 30
accelerator. seconds at a time. If the engine stalls or
• (Germany) fails to start, wait 30 seconds before
Drive immediately after starting the trying again. Otherwise, you may
engine. However don’t use high damage the starter and drain the
engine speeds until reaching the battery.
operating temperature.
7. After starting the engine, let it idle for
Diesel engine about 10 seconds (prohibited in
Germany).
1. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
NOTE
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.
• For easier starting, all the
3. Depress the brake pedal. accessories should be OFF.
4. Depress the clutch pedal all the way • The engine may not start when
and shift into neutral. trying to start the engine with the
Keep the pedal depressed while glow plug indicator on.
cranking the engine.
• If the glow plug indicator stays on
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or doesn’t come on at all, the glow
position. The glow plug indicator will plug control system could have an
come on. Wait a few seconds for the electrical problem. If one of these
glow plug indicator to go out. happens, consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
• (Germany)
Drive immediately after starting the
engine. However don’t use high
engine speeds until reaching the
operating temperature.

5-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Brake System WARNING


▼ Foot Brake
Driving with the Engine Off:
Your Mazda has power-assisted brakes Continuing to drive when the engine
that adjust automatically through normal is stalled or turned off is dangerous.
use. Braking will require more effort, and
the brake’s power-assist could be
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by depleted if you pump the brake. This
applying greater force than normal to the will cause longer stopping distances
brake pedal. But the distance required to or even an accident. Don’t continue
stop will be greater than usual. driving when the engine is stalled or
turned off, find a safe place to stop.

Riding the Brakes:


Driving with your foot continuously
on the brake pedal or steadily
applying the brakes for long distances
is dangerous. This causes overheated
brakes, resulting in longer stopping
distances or even total brake failure.
This could cause loss of vehicle
control and a serious accident. Avoid
continuous application of the brakes.
Shift to a lower gear when going
down steep hills.

Driving with Wet Brakes:


Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been
affected. Dry the brakes by driving
very slowly and applying the brakes
lightly until brake performance is
normal.

5-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

▼ Parking Brake Pedal type


Setting the parking brake
CAUTION Depress the brake pedal, then depress the
Driving with the parking brake on will parking brake pedal fully.
cause excessive wear of the brake
linings or pads.

Lever type
Setting the parking brake
Depress the brake pedal, then pull the
brake handle fully upward.

Releasing the parking brake


Depress the brake pedal, then depress the
parking brake pedal until it releases.
Gradually let up on the parking brake
pedal.

Releasing the parking brake


Depress the brake pedal, then pull the
handle up and press the button. Lower the
handle to the release position while
holding in the button.

NOTE
Release the parking brake once before
trying to reapply it.

5-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

▼ Brake System Warning Light Even if the light goes off, have your brake
system inspected as soon as possible.
Electronic brake force distribution
system warning
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
control unit may turn the brake system
This warning has the following functions:
warning light on.
Parking brake warning In this case, the ABS warning light comes
on at the same time (page 5-31).
The light comes on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the START or ON position. It goes off
when the parking brake is fully released.
WARNING
Low brake fluid level warning/ Brake Warning Light:
Electronic brake force distribution Driving with the brake system
system warning warning light on is dangerous. It
indicates that your brakes may not
If the light stays on after the parking brake work at all or that they could
is fully released, you may have a brake completely fail at any time. If this
problem. light remains on, have the brakes
inspected immediately. Don’t drive
Drive to the side of the road and park off with this light on, and contact an
the right-of-way. Authorised Mazda Dealer to have the
Low brake fluid level warning brakes inspected as soon as possible.
You may notice that the pedal is harder to ABS Warning Light and Brake
push or that it may go closer to the floor. Warning Light on at the Same Time:
In either case, it will take longer to stop Driving when the brake system
the vehicle. warning light and ABS warning light
are on at the same time is dangerous.
1. With the engine stopped, check the
When both lights are on, the rear
brake fluid level immediately and add
wheels could lock more quickly in an
fluid as required (page 8-19).
emergency stop than under normal
2. After adding fluid, check the light circumstances.
again. Don’t drive with both lights on, and
contact an Authorised Mazda Dealer
to have the brakes inspected as soon
If the warning light remains on, or if the
as possible.
brakes do not operate properly, do not
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an
Authorised Mazda Dealer.

5-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Brake booster vacuum warning (Diesel


engine) WARNING
NOTE ABS:
The ABS cannot compensate for
If the brake pedal is depressed quickly unsafe and reckless driving, excessive
and repeatedly, the warning light may speed, tailgating (following another
come on and remain on a few seconds vehicle too closely), and hydroplaning
as a result of a momentary decrease in (reduced tyre friction and road
the brake booster vacuum. This does contact because of water on the road
not indicate a system problem. surface). You can still have an
accident. So don’t rely on ABS as a
If the light illuminates when the engine is substitute for safe driving.
running, perform the following:
1. Carefully park your vehicle out of
traffic. NOTE

2. Stop the engine. Braking distances may be longer on


loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for
3. Make sure that the parking brake was example) which usually have a hard
not set. foundation. A vehicle with a normal
4. Check the brake fluid level. braking system may require less
distance to stop under these conditions
5. Check the vacuum pump drive belt for because the tyres will build up a wedge
tension or breakage. of surface layer when the wheels skid.
▼ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
▼ ABS Warning Light
The ABS control unit continuously
monitors the speed of each wheel. If one
is about to lock up, the ABS responds by
automatically releasing and reapplying
that wheel’s brake.

The driver will feel a slight vibration in


the brake pedal and may hear a chattering
noise from the brake system. This is The warning light stays on for a few
normal when the ABS operates. Don’t seconds when the ignition switch is turned
pump the brakes, continue to press down to the ON position.
on the brake pedal.
If the ABS warning light stays on while
you’re driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
occurs, your brakes will function
normally as if the vehicle had no ABS.

5-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 9 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Should this happen, consult an Authorised ▼ Brake Pad Wear Indicator


Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
When the disc brake pads become worn,
the built-in wear indicators contact the
WARNING disc plates. This causes a screeching noise
to warn that the pads should be replaced.
ABS Warning Light and Brake
Warning Light on at the Same Time:
Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are on at the same time is dangerous.
When both lights are on, the rear
wheels could lock more quickly in an
emergency stop than under normal
circumstances.
Don’t drive with both lights on, and
contact an Authorised Mazda Dealer
to have the brakes inspected as soon
as possible. When you hear this noise, consult an
Authorised Mazda Dealer as soon as
NOTE possible.

When the engine is jump-started to


charge the battery, uneven rpm occurs WARNING
and the ABS warning light comes on.
This is due to a weak battery, not a Driving with Worn Disc Pads:
malfunction. Driving with worn disc pads is
Recharge the battery. dangerous. The brakes could fail and
cause a serious accident. As soon as
you hear a screeching noise consult
an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

5-9

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 10 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Manual Transaxle CAUTION


Operation
• Keep your foot off the clutch pedal
▼ Manual Transaxle Shift Pattern except when shifting gears. Also,
don’t use the clutch to hold the
vehicle on an upgrade. This will
avoid needless clutch wear and
damage.
• Make sure the vehicle comes to a
complete stop before shifting to
Neutral position reverse.
Shifting to reverse while the vehicle
is still moving may damage the
transaxle.

NOTE
The shift pattern of the transaxle is
conventional, as shown. If shifting to reverse is difficult, shift
into neutral, release the clutch pedal,
Press the clutch pedal all the way down and try again.
while shifting; then release it slowly.

A safety feature prevents accidental


shifting from 5 to reverse. The shift lever
must be put in neutral before being shifted
to reverse.

WARNING
Sudden Engine-Braking:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or driving at
high speeds causes sudden engine
braking, which is dangerous. The
sudden change in tyre speed could
cause the tyres to skid. This could
lead to loss of vehicle control and an
accident. Do not use sudden engine
braking on slippery road surfaces or
at high speeds.

5-10

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 11 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Column shift model


Automatic Transaxle
Controls
Floor shift model

Lock-release button Hold button


To prevent unsafe Pushing this button
shifting activates the hold
mode.
Hold button Pushing this again
Pushing this button activates deactivates this
the hold mode. mode.
Pushing this again
deactivates this mode.

Shift pattern
indicator
Shows shift lever
position
Various Lockouts:

Australia model Indicates that you must depress


the brake pedal and pull the
Various Lockouts: shift lever toward you to shift
(The ignition switch must be in
the ON position).
Indicates that you must depress
Indicates the shift lever can be
the brake pedal and hold in the
shifted freely into any position.
lock-release button to shift.
Indicates the shift lever can be Indicates that you must pull the
shifted freely into any position. shift lever toward you to shift.

Indicates that you must hold in


the lock-release button to shift.

5-11

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 12 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

▼ Transaxle Ranges N (Neutral)


The shift lever must be in P or N to In N, the wheels and transaxle are not
operate the starter. locked. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
P (Park) brake or brakes are on.
P locks the transaxle and prevents the
front wheels from rotating.
WARNING
WARNING Shifting from N or P:
It’s dangerous to shift from N or P
Holding the Vehicle with P: into a driving gear when the engine is
Setting the shift lever to the P position running faster than idle. If this is
without using the parking brake to done, the vehicle could move
hold the vehicle is dangerous. If P suddenly, causing an accident or
fails to hold, the vehicle could move serious injury. If the engine is
and cause an accident. To hold the running faster than idle, don’t shift
vehicle, set the shift lever to P AND from N or P into a driving gear.
set the parking brake.
Shifting into N while Driving:
Shifting into N while driving is
CAUTION dangerous. Engine braking cannot be
applied when decelerating which
• Shifting into P, N or R while the could lead to an accident or serious
vehicle is moving can damage your injury. Do not shift into N when
transaxle. driving the vehicle.
• Shifting into a driving gear or
reverse when the engine is running D (Drive)
faster than idle can damage the D is the normal driving position. From a
transaxle. stop, the transaxle will automatically shift
through a 4-gear sequence.
R (Reverse)
S (Second)
In position R, the vehicle moves only
The S position is helpful when driving in
backward. You must be at a complete stop
before shifting to or from R, except as slow-moving traffic and when climbing a
explained under Rocking the Vehicle hill.
(page 4-8). L (Low)
Use the L position when pulling heavy
loads and climbing steep grades.

5-12

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 13 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Shift patterns without hold mode: 3. Move the shift lever.


D 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th
S 1st, 2nd, 3rd NOTE
L 1st, 2nd
• If the brake is pumped with the shift
lever in P, a chattering near the shift
WARNING lever may be heard. This does not
indicate an abnormality.
Sudden Engine-Braking: • When the ignition switch is in the
Shifting down while driving on wet, ACC or LOCK position, the
snowy, or frozen roads, or driving at transaxle cannot be shifted from P.
high speeds causes sudden engine
braking, which is dangerous. The • (Except Indonesia)
sudden change in tyre speed could To be sure the vehicle is in park,
cause the tyres to skid. This could the ignition key cannot be
lead to loss of vehicle control and an removed unless the shift lever is in
accident. Do not use sudden engine P.
braking on slippery road surfaces or
at high speeds. ▼ Shift-Lock Override (Column
shift model)
▼ Shift-Lock System
If the shift lever won’t move from P with
Floor shift, Australia model the brake pedal depressed, continue to
hold down the pedal.
The shift-lock system prevents shifting
out of P unless the brake pedal is 1. Remove the shift-lock override cover
depressed. with a screwdriver or similar tool.
2. Push the shift-lock override button
To shift from P:
down.
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Push and hold the lock-release button.
4. Move the shift lever.
Column shift model Cover

The shift-lock system prevents shifting


out of P unless the brake pedal is Shift-lock
depressed. override button

To shift from P:
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 3. Move the shift lever.
2. Start the engine.

5-13

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 14 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

4. Take the vehicle to an Authorised When the hold mode is on


Mazda Dealer to have the system
D (Drive)
checked.
The transaxle is held in third. It
▼ Hold Mode automatically downshifts to a lower gear
The hold mode stops the automatic speed- at a stop, however, and returns to third for
change operation and has three positions: smoother acceleration.
third (D), second (S), and first (L). S (Second)
Hold operation The transaxle is held in second. Don’t
Use the hold mode when starting from a drive faster than the speeds indicated in
stop on slippery surfaces, when driving up the following:
steep inclines, and for braking assistance
on downgrades. FP engine 100km/h (60mph)
FS engine 106km/h (66mph)
Push the hold button to activate the hold L (Low)
mode. Push it again to deactivate it.
The transaxle is held in first. Don’t drive
Floor shift model faster than the speeds indicated in the
following:

FP engine 51km/h (30mph)


FS engine 54km/h (33mph)
Hold button
Shift-up patterns with hold mode on

3rd (temporarily lowers


D-Hold
gears for standing start)
S-Hold 2nd (fixed)
L-Hold 1st (fixed)

Column shift model


NOTE
The hold mode is automatically
cancelled when the ignition is
switched off.

Hold button

5-14

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 15 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Hold indicator Descending steep grades


When descending a steep grade, shift to S,
or L, depending on load weight and grade
steepness. Descend slowly, using the
brakes only occasionally to prevent them
from overheating.

This light comes on when the hold mode


is selected.

CAUTION
If the hold indicator light flashes, the
transaxle has an electrical problem.
Continuing to drive your Mazda in this
condition could cause damage to your
transaxle. Consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

▼ Driving Tips
Passing
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress
the accelerator fully. The transaxle will
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle
speed.
Climbing steep grades from a stop
To climb a steep grade from a stopped
position:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift to D, S, or L, depending on the
load weight and grade steepness.
3. Release all brakes while gradually
accelerating.

5-15

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 16 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

Power Steering Traction Control System


Power steering is only operable when the
(TCS)
engine is running. If the engine is off or if The Traction Control System (TCS)
the power steering system is inoperable, enhances traction and safety by regulating
you can still steer, but it requires more engine torque. When the TCS detects
physical effort. driving wheel slippage, it lowers engine
torque to prevent loss of traction.
If the steering feels rigid during normal
driving, consult an Authorised Mazda This means that on a slick surface, the
Dealer. engine adjusts automatically to provide
optimum power to the drive wheels
CAUTION without causing them to spin and lose
traction.
Never hold the steering wheel to the
extreme left or right for more than 5
seconds with the engine running. WARNING
This could damage the power steering
system. TCS and Unsafe Driving:
The traction control system (TCS)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tyre friction and road
contact because of water on the road
surface). You can still have an
accident. So don’t rely on the traction
control system as a substitute for safe
driving.

TCS and Snow and Ice:


Driving without proper traction
devices on snow and ice-covered
roads is dangerous. The traction
control system (TCS) alone cannot
provide adequate traction and you
could still have an accident. Use snow
tyres or tyre chains and drive at
reduced speeds when roads are
covered with ice and snow.

5-16

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 17 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

▼ TCS/DSC Indicator Light ▼ TCS OFF Indicator Light

This indicator light stays on for a few This light comes on when the ignition
seconds when the ignition switch is turned switch is turned to the ON position.
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is It goes off when the engine is started. It
operating, the indicator light flashes. also comes on when you switch off the
traction control system or when the
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may system has a malfunction.
have a malfunction and they may not
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an NOTE
Authorised Mazda Dealer.
After starting the engine on very cold
days, the TCS OFF indicator will
NOTE remain on and TCS will not operate
until the engine is warm.
• In addition to the indicator light
flashing, a slight labouring sound
will come from the engine. This
indicates that the TCS is operating
properly.
• On slippery surfaces, such as fresh
snow, it will be impossible to
achieve high rpm when the TCS is
on.

5-17

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 18 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

▼ TCS OFF Switch


Dynamic Stability Control
Press the TCS OFF switch to turn off the (DSC)
TCS. The TCS OFF indicator light will
illuminate. The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
automatically controls braking and engine
torque in conjunction with systems such
as ABS and TCS to control side slip when
driving on slippery surfaces, or during
sudden or evasive manoeuvring,
enhancing vehicle the safety.

Refer to ABS (page 5-8) and TCS (page


5-16).

DSC operation is possible at speeds


Press the switch again to turn the TCS greater than 20 km/h (12 mph).
back on. The TCS OFF indicator light
will go out.
WARNING
NOTE DSC and Unsafe Driving:
• When TCS is on and you attempt to The dynamic stability control (DSC)
free the vehicle when it is stuck, or cannot compensate for unsafe and
drive it out of freshly fallen snow, reckless driving excessive speed,
the TCS will activate. Depressing tailgating (following another vehicle
the accelerator will not increase too closely), and hydroplaning
engine power and freeing the (reduced tyre friction and road
vehicle may be difficult. When this contact because of water on the road
happens, turn off the TCS. surface). You can still have an
accident. So don’t rely on the
• If the TCS is off when the engine is dynamic stability control as a
turned off, it automatically activates substitute for safe driving.
when the ignition switch is turned
on.
• Leaving the TCS on will provide the
best traction.

5-18

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 19 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Starting and Driving

▼ TCS/DSC Indicator Light

This indicator light stays on for a few


seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is
operating, the indicator light flashes.

If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may


have a malfunction and they may not
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorised Mazda Dealer.

5-19

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 20 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Instrument Cluster and Indicators

Meters and Gauges

1 Speedometer .............................................................................................................5-21
2 Odometer and Trip Meter .........................................................................................5-21
3 Tachometer ...............................................................................................................5-22
4 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge ........................................................................5-22
5 Fuel Gauge ...............................................................................................................5-23
6 Trip Computer ..........................................................................................................5-23

5-20

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 21 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Instrument Cluster and Indicators

▼ Speedometer
NOTE
The speedometer indicates the speed of
the vehicle. The odometer and trip meter can be
displayed as follows even when the
▼ Odometer and Trip Meter ignition switch is in the ACC or LOCK
The display mode can be changed from position.
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B • Displays for 10 minutes after the
and then back to odometer by pressing the ignition switch is turned to the ACC
selector while they are displayed. The or LOCK position from the ON
selected mode will be displayed. position.
• Displays for 10 minutes after any
Selector
door is opened.

Odometer
When this mode is selected, ODO will be
displayed.
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
Odometer
The trip meter can record the total
distance of two trips. One is recorded in
trip meter A, and the other is recorded in
trip meter B.
Press the selector
Trip meter A For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and trip
meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is filled.
Press the selector
Trip meter B When trip meter A is selected, pressing
the selector again within one second will
change to trip meter B mode.

Press the selector


When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.

5-21

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 22 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Instrument Cluster and Indicators

The trip meter records the total distance Diesel engine


the vehicle is driven until the meter is
again reset. Return it to "0.0" by holding
the selector depressed for more than 1
second. Use this meter to measure trip
distances and to compute fuel
consumption.
Red zone
NOTE
• Only the trip meters record tenths of
kilometres (miles).
• The trip record will be erased when;
• The power supply is interrupted
CAUTION
(blown fuse or the battery is Don’t run the engine with the
disconnected). tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.
• The vehicle is driven over 999.9 This may cause severe engine damage.
km (mile).
▼ Engine Coolant Temperature
▼ Tachometer Gauge
The tachometer shows engine speed in The engine coolant temperature gauge
thousands of revolutions per minute shows the temperature of the engine coolant.
(rpm).
Petrol engine

Red zone

If the needle exceeds normal range toward


H, it indicates overheating.

CAUTION
Driving with an overheated engine can
cause serious engine damage (page 7-12).

5-22

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 23 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Instrument Cluster and Indicators

▼ Fuel Gauge ▼ Trip Computer


The fuel gauge shows approximately how The trip computer display is located in the
much fuel is in the tank. We recommend instrument cluster.
keeping the tank over 1/4 full. When the The trip computer can display the
low fuel warning light illuminates or following:
when the needle is near E, refuel as soon
• The outside temperature.
as possible.
• The current fuel economy.
• The average fuel economy.
• The approximate distance you can
travel on the available fuel.
• The average vehicle speed.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
Low fuel warning
Press the INFO switch to change the
light
display mode.

Trip computer display


▼ Instrument Panel Illumination
When the headlight switch is in the
or position, rotate the thumb-wheel
to adjust the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.

Bright

If you have any problems with your trip


Dim computer, consult an Authorised Mazda
Dealer.

5-23

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 24 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Instrument Cluster and Indicators

Outside temperature display Current fuel economy mode


This mode displays the outside This mode displays the current fuel
temperature. economy by calculating the amount of
fuel consumed and the distance travelled.

Current fuel economy will be calculated


and displayed every 2 seconds.

When this mode is selected, CONSUM


CUR will be displayed.

NOTE
The outside temperature displayed
may differ from the actual temperature
on account of surrounding conditions,
driving conditions.
When you’ve slowed to about 5 km/h
(3mph), ---- L/100km (----L/100 mile)
will be displayed.

5-24

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 25 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Instrument Cluster and Indicators

Average fuel economy mode Distance-to-empty mode


This mode displays the average fuel This mode displays the approximate
economy by calculating the fuel and the distance you can travel on the remaining
distance travelled since pressing the SET fuel based on the fuel economy for the last
switch or since connecting the battery. 32 km (20 mile).

Average fuel economy will be calculated The distance-to-empty will be calculated


and displayed every minute. and displayed every minute.

When this mode is selected, CONSUM When this mode is selected, REMNG will
AV will be displayed. be displayed.

To clear the data being displayed, press When the remaining travel distance is 50
the SET switch for more than 1 second. km (31 mile) or less, ---- km (---- mile)
After pressing the SET switch, ---- L/ will be displayed.
100km (---- L/100mile) will be displayed
for about 1 minute before the fuel
economy is recalculated and displayed.

5-25

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 26 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Instrument Cluster and Indicators

Average vehicle speed mode


NOTE
This mode displays the average vehicle
• Even through the distance-to-empty speed by calculating the distance and the
display may indicate a sufficient time travelled since connecting the battery
amount of remaining mileage or resetting the data.
before refuelling is required, refuel
as soon as possible if the fuel gauge Average vehicle speed will be calculated
needle nears E or the low fuel and displayed every 10 seconds.
warning light illuminates.
• The distance-to-empty display will When this mode is selected, AV will be
not change after refuelling until you displayed.
resume driving.
• The display won’t change unless
you add more than 20 L of fuel.
• After the battery is connected, ----
km (---- mile) will be displayed for
a travel distance of 100 km (62
mile).

To clear the data being displayed, press


the SET switch for more than 1 second.
After pressing the SET switch, ---- km/h
(---- mile/h) will be displayed for about 1
minute before the vehicle speed is
recalculated and displayed.

5-26

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 27 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

Warning/Indicator Lights

Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas

Signal Warning/Indicator Lights Page

Brake System Warning Light 5-29

Charging System Warning Light 5-30

Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light 5-30

Check Engine Light 5-31

ABS Warning Light 5-31

Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light 5-32

Low Fuel Warning Light 5-32

5-27

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 28 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

Signal Warning/Indicator Lights Page

Seat Belt Warning Light 5-32

Door-Ajar Warning Light 5-33

Sedimentor Warning Light 5-33

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light 5-33

Immobilizer System Warning/Security Indicator Light 5-33

Air Bag Cut-Off System Indicator Light 5-34

Headlight Main-Beam Indicator Light 5-35

Front Fog Lights Indicator Light 5-35

Rear Fog Light Indicator Light 5-35

Hold Indicator Light 5-35

Shift Position Indicator Light 5-35

Glow Plug Indicator Light 5-36

TCS/DSC Indicator Light 5-36

TCS OFF Indicator Light 5-36

5-28

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 29 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

▼ Brake System Warning Light


Even if the light goes off, have your brake
system inspected as soon as possible.
Electronic brake force distribution
system warning
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
This warning has the following functions: control unit may turn the brake system
warning light on.
Parking brake warning
In this case, the ABS warning light comes
The light comes on when the parking on at the same time (page 5-31).
brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the START or ON position. It goes off
when the parking brake is fully released. WARNING
Low brake fluid level warning/ Brake Warning Light:
Electronic brake force distribution Driving with the brake system
system warning warning light on is dangerous. It
If the light stays on after the parking brake indicates that your brakes may not
is fully released, you may have a brake work at all or that they could
problem. completely fail at any time. If this
light remains on, have the brakes
Drive to the side of the road and park off inspected immediately. Don’t drive
the right-of-way. with this light on, and contact an
Authorised Mazda Dealer to have the
Low brake fluid level warning brakes inspected as soon as possible.
You may notice that the pedal is harder to
push or that it may go closer to the floor. ABS Warning Light and Brake
In either case, it will take longer to stop Warning Light on at the Same Time:
the vehicle. Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are on at the same time is dangerous.
1. With the engine stopped, check the When both lights are on, the rear
brake fluid level immediately and add wheels could lock more quickly in an
fluid as required (page 8-19). emergency stop than under normal
2. After adding fluid, check the light circumstances.
again. Don’t drive with both lights on, and
contact an Authorised Mazda Dealer
If the warning light remains on, or if the to have the brakes inspected as soon
brakes do not operate properly, do not as possible.
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an
Authorised Mazda Dealer.

5-29

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 30 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

Brake booster vacuum warning (Diesel If the warning light comes on while
engine) driving, it indicates a malfunction of the
alternator or of the charging system.
NOTE Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way. Consult an Authorised
If the brake pedal is depressed quickly Mazda Dealer.
and repeatedly, the warning light may
come on and remain on a few seconds
as a result of a momentary decrease in CAUTION
the brake booster vacuum. This does Don’t continue driving when the
not indicate a system problem. charging system warning light is
illuminated.
If the light illuminates when the engine is
running, perform the following:
▼ Engine Oil Pressure Warning
1. Carefully park your vehicle out of Light
traffic.
2. Stop the engine.
3. Make sure that the parking brake was
not set.
4. Check the brake fluid level.
5. Check the vacuum pump drive belt for
tension or breakage. This warning light indicates low engine
oil pressure.
▼ Charging System Warning Light
If the light comes on while driving:
1. Drive to the side of the road and park
off the right-of-way.
2. Turn off the engine and inspect the
engine oil level (page 8-17). If it’s low,
add oil.
This warning light comes on when the 3. Check the light.
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and goes off when the engine is
If the light remains on even after you add
started.
oil, have your vehicle towed to the nearest
service station or to an Authorised Mazda
Dealer.

5-30

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 31 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

▼ ABS Warning Light


CAUTION
Don’t run the engine if oil pressure is
low. It could result in extensive engine
damage.

▼ Check Engine Light

The warning light stays on for a few


seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.

If the ABS warning light stays on while


you’re driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
If this light comes on while driving, the occurs, your brakes will function
vehicle may have a problem. It is normally as if the vehicle had no ABS.
important to note the driving conditions Should this happen, consult an Authorised
when the light came on and consult an Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Authorised Mazda Dealer.

The check engine light may come on in WARNING


the following cases:
ABS Warning Light and Brake
• The fuel tank level being very low or Warning Light on at the Same Time:
approaching empty. Driving when the brake system
• The engine’s electrical system has a warning light and ABS warning light
problem. are on at the same time is dangerous.
When both lights are on, the rear
• The emission control system has a
wheels could lock more quickly in an
problem.
emergency stop than under normal
circumstances.
If the check engine light flashes Don’t drive with both lights on, and
continuously, decrease your speed and contact an Authorised Mazda Dealer
consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer as to have the brakes inspected as soon
soon as possible. as possible.

5-31

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 32 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

NOTE
WARNING
When the engine is jump-started to
charge the battery, uneven rpm occurs Self-Servicing the Air Bag/
and the ABS warning light comes on. Pretensioner Systems:
This is due to a weak battery, not a Self-servicing or tampering with the
malfunction. systems is dangerous. An air bag/
Recharge the battery. pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled. This
▼ Air Bag/Front Seat Belt could cause serious injuries. Never
Pretensioner System Warning tamper with the systems and always
Light have an Authorised Mazda Dealer
perform all servicing and repairs.

▼ Low Fuel Warning Light

If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner


system is OK, the warning light comes on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position or after the engine is cranked. This warning light in the fuel gauge
After about 6 seconds it goes out. signals that the fuel tank will soon be
empty.
A system malfunction is indicated when Get fuel as soon as possible.
the warning light constantly flashes, stays ▼ Seat Belt Warning Light
on or doesn’t come on at all. If any of (Except European Model)
these occur, consult an Authorised Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.

If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened


when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the seat belt warning light
will remain on until the belt is fastened.
If the system does not operate correctly,
consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

5-32

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 33 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

▼ Door-Ajar Warning Light ▼ Immobilizer System Warning/


Security Indicator Light

This warning light comes on when any


door isn’t securely closed. Immobilizer system warning light
▼ Sedimentor Warning Light When the key is in the ignition switch,
(Diesel engine) this light serves as the immobilizer system
warning light.

If the immobilizer system is working


properly, the light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON or
START position. The light will go out
when confirmation by the immobilizer
system is completed.
The fuel filter acts as a sedimentor that
separates water from the fuel. If the light flashes rapidly, fails to come
on, or comes on and stays on, it indicates
If 0.05 L (0.052 US qt, 0.044 Imp qt) of a system malfunction. If any of these
water accumulates in this filter, the occur, contact an Authorised Mazda
warning light will come on. Dealer as soon as possible.
When it does, drain the water (page 8-26).
Security indicator light
▼ Low Washer Fluid Level With theft-deterrent system
Warning Light
When there is no key in the ignition
switch, and the theft-deterrent system has
been armed, the light will flash once every
3 seconds. This indicates that the system
is working properly.
With double-locking system
After the double-lock system has been
This warning light reveals that little activated, the light comes on for about 3
windscreen washer fluid remains. Add seconds. This indicates that the system
fluid (page 8-23). has been activated properly.

5-33

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 34 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

▼ Air Bag Cut-Off System


Indicator Light WARNING
Sitting on Additional Seat Cushion:
Sitting on an additional seat cushion
on the front passenger seat is
dangerous. The air bag cut-off system
may not function properly because
the additional seat cushion could
cause sensor interference. During an
This light comes on when the ignition accident, the front seat passenger will
switch is turned to the ON position. not have the supplementary
protection of the air bag. This could
After about 6 seconds it goes out if a result in serious injuries. Do not sit
child-restraint system designed for on an additional seat cushion on the
Mazda’s air bag cut-off system is not front passenger seat.
installed on the front passenger seat.

This light comes on and stays on when a CAUTION


child-restraint system designed for
Mazda’s air bag cut-off system is installed To prevent damage to the seat sensors
on the front passenger seat. The front installed in the seat bottom, don’t place
passenger seat’s front and side air bags anything sharp on the seat bottom or
and the seat belt pretensioner system are leave heavy luggage on it for a long
also turned off. time.

The air bag cut-off indicator light doesn’t


come on when: NOTE
• There is no passenger on the front The system requires about 7 seconds to
passenger seat. (The front passenger alternate between turning the air bag
seat’s front and side air bags and the system on or off.
seat belt pretensioner system are turned
off.)
• A regular child-restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat, or
luggage or cargo is placed on the seat.
(The air bag cut-off indicator light isn’t
on, the front passenger seat’s front and
side air bags and the seat belt
pretensioner system can still activate in
an accident.)

5-34

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 35 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

▼ Headlight Main-Beam Indicator ▼ HOLD Indicator Light


Light (Automatic transaxle)

This light indicates one of two things: This light comes on when the hold mode
is selected.
• The main-beam headlights are on.
• The direction indicator lever is in the
flash-to-pass position. CAUTION
▼ Front Fog Lights Indicator Light If the hold indicator light flashes, the
transaxle has an electrical problem.
Continuing to drive your Mazda in this
condition could cause damage to your
transaxle. Consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

This light comes on when the front fog


lights are operating.
▼ Rear Fog Light Indicator Light

This light comes on when the rear fog


light is operating.

5-35

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 36 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

▼ Shift Position Indicator Light ▼ TCS/DSC Indicator Light


This indicates the selected shift position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

This indicator light stays on for a few


seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is
operating, the indicator light flashes.

If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may


have a malfunction and they may not
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorised Mazda Dealer.

▼ TCS OFF Indicator Light

▼ Glow Plug Indicator Light


(Diesel engine)

This light comes on when the ignition


switch is turned to the ON position.
It goes off when the engine is started. It
also comes on when you switch off the
traction control system or when the
This light comes on when the ignition system has a malfunction.
switch is in the ON position.
It goes out when the glow plug is warm. NOTE
After starting the engine on very cold
days, the TCS OFF indicator will
remain on and TCS will not operate
until the engine is warm.

5-36

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 37 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Warning/Indicator Lights and Beeps

Beeps
▼ Ignition Key Reminder
(Except European model)
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or
ACC position, a beep will sound when
any door is opened.
▼ Lights-On Reminder
If lights are on and the key is removed
from the ignition switch, a beep will
sound when any door is opened.

5-37

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 38 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Switches and Controls

▼ Headlight Main-Low Beam


Lighting Control
Push the lever forward for main beam.
Pull it back for low.

Main beam

Low beam

▼ Headlights
To turn on the lights, turn the knob on the ▼ Flashing the Headlights
end of the control lever. To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully
toward you. The headlight switch need
Lever Position OFF not be on, and the lever will return to the
Headlights Off Off On normal position when released.
Tail Lights
Parking lights Off On On
Number plate lights

NOTE
To prevent discharging the battery,
don’t leave the lights on while the
engine is off.

▼ Lights-On Reminder
If lights are on and the key is removed
from the ignition switch, a beep will ▼ Headlight Levelling
sound when any door is opened.
The number of riders and weight of cargo
in the luggage compartment change the
angle of the headlights.
The headlight levelling switch adjusts this
angle.

5-38

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 39 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Switches and Controls

Turn and Lane-Change


Signals
▼ Direction Indicator
Move the signal lever down (for a left
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop
position. The signal will self-cancel after
the turn is completed.

If the indicator light continues to flash


after a turn, manually return the lever to
Select the proper setting from the its original position.
following chart.

Front seat Rear Switch


Load Right turn
Driver Passenger seat Position
Right lane
× — — — 0 change
× × — — 0
× × × — 1 OFF
× × × × 2
Left lane
× — — × 3
change
×: Yes —: No
Left turn
▼ Running Lights
Some countries require moving vehicles
to have their lights on (running lights) Green indicators on the instrument panel
during the daytime. show which signal is working.
Lane-change signals
Running lights come on automatically
when the ignition switch is in the ON Move the lever slightly toward the
position. direction of the change —until the
indicator flashes— and hold it there. It
They turn off when the parking lights are will return to the off position when
turned on. released.

NOTE
If an indicator light stays on without
flashing or if it flashes abnormally, the
direction indicator bulb may be burned
out.

5-39

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 40 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Switches and Controls

Front Fog Lights Rear Fog Light


Use this switch to turn on the front fog Use this switch to turn on the rear fog
lights. They help you to see as well as to light. The rear fog light helps your vehicle
be seen. to be seen.

To turn on the rear fog light, turn the


headlights on and then press the rear fog
light switch.
To turn it off, press it again or turn the
headlights off.

To turn on the front fog lights, first turn on


the headlight switch. Then press the front
fog light switch.
To turn the front fog lights off, press the
front fog light switch again or turn the
headlight switch off.
NOTE
If your vehicle has front fog lights, you
can turn on the rear fog light when the
front fog lights are on.

5-40

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 41 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Switches and Controls

▼ Windscreen Wipers
Windscreen Wipers and
Washer
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position. OFF

INT
WARNING
1
Frozen Washer Fluid:
Using windscreen washer fluid in 2
freezing temperatures is dangerous.
The washer fluid could freeze on the
windscreen and block your vision. Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever
You could have an accident. Don’t use down.
the washer without first warming the INT — Intermittent
windscreen. 1 — Normal
2 — Fast
NOTE Variable-speed intermittent wipers

Because heavy ice and snow can jam Set the lever to INT and choose the
the wiper blades, the wiper motor is interval timing by rotating the ring.
protected by a circuit breaker. This
mechanism will automatically stop
operation of the blades, but only for
about 5 minutes.
OFF
If this happens, turn off the wiper ON

switch and park off the right-of-way, INT


and remove the snow and ice.
After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and
the blades should operate normally. If
they don’t resume functioning, consult INT ring
an Authorised Mazda Dealer as soon
as possible.

5-41

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 42 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Switches and Controls

One-touch wipers
Rear Window Wiper and
For a single wiping cycle, push the lever
up to MIST. Washer
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
MIST
▼ Rear Window Wiper
OFF

Washer ON
INT
OFF
Washer

▼ Windscreen Washer
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to
spray washer fluid.
Turn the wiper on by turning the knob.
ON — Normal
INT — Intermittent

▼ Rear Window Washer


To spray washer fluid, turn the knob to the
position. After the knob is released,
the washer will stop.

NOTE
There are two washer positions: up and
NOTE down. In the down washer position, the
In the OFF or INT position, the wipers wiper will not be activated.
will be activated until the lever is
released. If the washer doesn’t work, inspect the
fluid level (page 8-23). If it’s OK and the
If the washer doesn’t work, inspect the washer still doesn’t work, consult an
fluid level (page 8-23). If it’s OK, consult Authorised Mazda Dealer.
an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

5-42

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 43 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Switches and Controls

Headlight Washer Rear Window Defroster


The ignition switch must be in the ACC or The rear defroster clears frost, fog, and
ON position. thin ice from the rear window.
Rotate the ring forward to wash the
headlights. The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.

Push the switch to turn on the rear


window defroster; the indicator light will
come on.

Push the switch again to turn it off.


Type A

CAUTION
Do not operate the headlight washer
for more than 10 seconds at a time to
avoid damaging the pump.

Type B

5-43

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 44 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Switches and Controls

CAUTION Horn
Don’t use sharp instruments or To sound the horn, press around the
window cleaners with abrasives to mark of the steering wheel.
clean the inside of the rear window
surface. They may damage the
defroster grid inside the window.

NOTE
This defroster is not designed for
melting snow. If there is an
accumulation of snow on the rear
window, brush it off before using the
defroster.

5-44

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 45 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Driving Your Mazda

Switches and Controls

Hazard Warning Flasher


The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway.

The hazard warning lights warn other


drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.

Hazard warning flasher switch

Depress the hazard warning switch and all


four direction indicators will flash at once.

NOTE
• The direction indicators don’t work
when the hazard warning lights are
on.
• Check local regulations about the
use of hazard warning lights while
the vehicle is being towed. They
may forbid it.

5-45

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 46 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

5-46

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

6 Interior Comfort

Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and


audio system.

Air-Conditioning System ............................................................ 6- 2


Operating Tips ......................................................................... 6- 2
Vent Operation ......................................................................... 6- 3
Types of the Air-Conditioning System .................................... 6- 5
Manual Type ............................................................................ 6- 6
Fully Automatic Type .............................................................. 6-11

Audio System ............................................................................... 6-16


Aerial ....................................................................................... 6-16
Operating Tips for Audio System ............................................ 6-16
Audio Set ................................................................................. 6-23
Audio Control Lever Operation ............................................... 6-50

Interior Equipment ..................................................................... 6-52


Sunvisors ................................................................................. 6-52
Interior Lights .......................................................................... 6-52
Clock ....................................................................................... 6-54
Lighter ..................................................................................... 6-55
Ashtray .................................................................................... 6-56
Cup Holder .............................................................................. 6-57
Storage Compartments ............................................................ 6-59
Accessory Socket .................................................................... 6-61

6-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

▼ Check the Refrigerant before


Operating Tips Weather Gets Hot
▼ Operating the Air-Conditioning Have the air conditioner checked before
System the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant
may make the air conditioner less
Operate the air-conditioning system with efficient. Consult an Authorised Mazda
the engine running. Dealer for refrigerant inspection.
▼ Clearing the Air Inlet
The optional air conditioner is filled with
Clear all obstructions like leaves, snow HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that will
and ice from the bonnet and the air inlet in not damage the ozone layer.
the cowling grille to improve the system If the air conditioner is low on refrigerant
efficiency. or has a malfunction, consult an
▼ Foggy Windows Authorised Mazda Dealer.

The windows may fog up easily in humid ▼ Replacement of the Cabin Air
weather. Use the air-conditioning system Filter
to defog the windows. If your vehicle is equipped with an air
filter for the air conditioner, it is necessary
To help defog the windows, operate the air to change the filter periodically as
conditioner to dehumidify the air. indicated in scheduled maintenance (page
▼ Outside/Recirculated Air 8-3). Consult an Authorised Mazda
Position Dealer for replacement of the cabin air
filter.
Use the outside air position in normal
conditions. The recirculated air position
can be used temporarily when driving on
dusty roads or for quick cooling of the
interior.
▼ Parking in Direct Sunlight
If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows to let warm air escape, then run
the air-conditioning system.
▼ Not Using for a Long Period
Run the air conditioner at least once a
month to keep internal parts lubricated.

6-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

Vent Operation

Open

Close

Knob

* Depending on the model some vents may not be available.

▼ Adjusting the Vents


Directing airflow
You can direct air flow by moving the adjustment knob.
Adjusting the amount of airflow (Left-hand drive model)
These vents can be opened and closed with wheel.

NOTE
When using the air conditioner, mist may come out from the vents. This is not a sign of
trouble but a result of humid air being suddenly cooled.

6-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

▼ Selecting the Airflow Mode

Instrument panel Vents Defroster and Floor Vents

Instrument panel and Floor Vents Defroster Vents

Floor Vents

* Left-hand drive model only.

6-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

Types of the Air-Conditioning System


Manual type and full-automatic type air-conditioning systems are explained separately.
Check your vehicle’s air-conditioning type and read the appropriate pages.

Manual Type ...................................................................................................................6-6

A/C
2
1 3
0 4

Fully Automatic Type ...................................................................................................6-11

6-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

Manual Type

Temperature control dial Rear window defroster switch (page 5-43)


Fan control dial
A/C swich Mode selector dial

Air intake selector

Lever type Switch type

▼ Control Switches Fan control dial


Temperature control dial

Cold Hot

This dial allows variable fan speeds.


0—Fan off
This dial controls temperature. Turn it 1—Low speed
clockwise for hot and anticlockwise for 2—Medium low speed
cold. 3—Medium high speed
4—High speed

6-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

Mode selector dial Air intake selector

Lever type

Turn the mode selector dial to select This lever controls the source of air
airflow mode (page 6-4). entering the vehicle.
A/C switch
It is recommended that under normal
conditions the lever be kept in the outside
air position.
Switch type

Push the switch to turn the air conditioner


on. An indicator light on the switch will
illuminate when the fan control dial is on. This switch controls the source of air
entering the vehicle.
Push the switch once again to turn the air
conditioner off. Press the switch to alternate between the
and positions. The
NOTE indicator light for the selected mode will
illuminate.
The air conditioner may not function
when the outside temperature It is recommended that under normal
approaches 0 °C (32 °F). conditions the switch be kept in the
outside air position.
Outside air position ( )
Outside air is taken into the vehicle. Use
this position for normal ventilation and
heating.

6-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

Recirculated air position ( ) 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn


on the air conditioner.
Outside air is shut off. Air within the
vehicle is recirculated. NOTE
This position can be used when driving on • If the windscreen fogs up easily, set
a dusty road or in similar conditions. It the mode selector dial to the
also helps to provide quicker cooling of position.
the interior.
• If cooler air is desired at face level,
set the mode selector dial at the
WARNING position and adjust the temperature
control dial to maintain maximum
The Recirculated Air Position: comfort.
Using the position in cold or • The air to the floor is warmer than
rainy weather will cause the glass to air to the face (except when the
fog up. Your vision will be hampered, temperature control dial is set at the
which could lead to a serious extreme hot or cold position).
accident. Do not use the
position in cold or rainy weather. ▼ Cooling (With Air Conditioner)
▼ Heating

1. Set the mode selector dial to the


1. Set the mode selector dial to the position.
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
2. Set the air intake selector to the desired position.
position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
3. Set the temperature control dial to the speed.
hot position.
4. Turn on the air conditioner.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.

6-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 9 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

5. Adjust the fan control dial and ▼ Ventilation


temperature control dial to maintain
maximum comfort.

CAUTION
When using the air conditioner while
driving up long hills or in heavy traffic,
closely monitor the temperature gauge
(page 5-22).
The air conditioner may cause engine
overheating. If the gauge indicates
overheating, turn the air conditioner
off.
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
NOTE 2. Set the air intake selector to the
• When maximum cooling is desired, position.
set the temperature control dial to 3. Set the temperature control dial to the
the extreme cold position and set desired position.
the air intake selector to the
position, then set the fan control dial 4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
to the position 4. speed.

• If warmer air is desired at floor ▼ Windscreen Defrosting and


level, set the mode selector dial at Defogging
the position and adjust the
temperature control dial to maintain
maximum comfort.
• The air to the floor is warmer than
air to the face (except when the
temperature control dial is set at the
extreme hot or cold position).

1. Set the mode selector dial to the


position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the
position (Lever type).

6-9

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 10 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

3. Set the temperature control dial to the ▼ Dehumidifying


desired position. (With Air Conditioner)
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.

WARNING
Foggy Windscreen:
Using the position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position will cause the outside of the
glass to fog up. Your vision will be
hampered, which could lead to a
serious accident. Set the temperature
control to the hot or warm position Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold
when using the position. weather to help defog the windscreen and
side windows.
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
NOTE desired position.
• For maximum defrosting, turn on 2. Set the air intake selector to the
the air conditioner, set the position.
temperature control dial to the
extreme hot position and the fan 3. Set the temperature control dial to the
control dial to position 4. desired position.

• If warm air is desired at the floor, 4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
set the mode selector dial to the speed.
position. 5. Turn on the air conditioner.

NOTE
(Switch type)
In the position, outside air is
automatically selected.

6-10

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 11 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

Fully Automatic Type

Windscreen defroster switch


Rear window Display
defroster switch Temperature control dial
(page 5-43)

AUTO switch A/C switch Air intake


OFF switch Mode selector switch selector switch
Fan switch

▼ Control Switches • Selection of airflow mode


AUTO switch • Outside/Recirculated air selection
• Air conditioner operation

NOTE
AUTO switch indicator light
• When on, it indicates AUTO
operation, and the system will
function automatically.
By pressing the AUTO switch the • When off, indicates the operation of
following functions will be automatically other switches such as the mode
controlled in accordance with the set selector switch, fan switch, A/C
temperature: switch and windscreen defroster
• Airflow temperature switch. Other functions will
continue to operate automatically.
• Amount of airflow

6-11

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 12 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

OFF switch Mode selector switch

Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the air- The desired airflow mode can be selected
conditioning system. (page 6-4).
Temperature control dial
NOTE

With the airflow mode set to


position and the temperature control
dial set at a medium temperature,
heated air is directed to the feet and a
Cold Hot comparably lower air temperature will
flow through the central, left and right
vents.
This dial controls temperature.Turn it A/C switch
clockwise for hot and anticlockwise for
cold.
Fan switch

With the AUTO or fan switch ON, press


the A/C switch to select the air
conditioning (cooling/dehumidifying
The fan has seven speeds. The selected functions) on or off. Successively pressing
speed will be displayed. the switch will display the following:
A/C→A/C ECO→off (not displayed)

6-12

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 13 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

NOTE
WARNING
• Although air conditioning and
defogging ability is reduced, the The Recirculated Air Position:
A/C ECO function is designed to Using the position in cold or
economize use of the air rainy weather will cause the glass to
conditioning system. fog up. Your vision will be hampered,
which could lead to a serious
• The air conditioner may not accident. Do not use the
function when the outside position in cold or rainy weather.
temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F). (Indicator remains on even
when system is off.) ▼ Standard Use
1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection of
Air intake selector switch the airflow mode, air intake selector
and amount of airflow will be
automatically controlled.

Outside or recirculated air positions can


be selected. Press the switch to select
outside/recirculated air positions. 2. Use the temperature control dial to
select a desired temperature.
Recirculated air position ( )
Use this position when going through
tunnels, driving in congested traffic (high
engine exhaust areas) or when quick
cooling is desired.
Outside air position ( ) Cold Hot
Use this position for normal conditions
and defogging.
To turn off the system, press the OFF
switch.

6-13

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 14 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

▼ Windscreen Defrosting and


NOTE Defogging
• Setting the temperature to
maximum high or low will not
provide the desired temperature at a
faster rate.
• To prevent cool air blowing from
the vents when heating right after
starting the engine, the amount of
airflow is reduced until the air
warms up. Press the windscreen defroster switch.
In this position, the outside air position is
automatically selected, and the air
NOTE conditioner automatically turned on. The
air conditioner will direct dehumidified
(European model)
air to the front windscreen and side
First set the temperature to 22.0 (°C),
windows (page 6-4). Airflow amount will
then adjust to the desired temperature.
be increased.
To turn off the system press the
NOTE windscreen defroster switch again.

(Except European model)


First set the temperature to 25.0 (°C), WARNING
then adjust to the desired temperature.
Foggy Windscreen:
Using the position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position will cause the outside of the
glass to fog up. Your vision will be
hampered, which could lead to a
serious accident. Set the temperature
control to hot or warm position when
using the position.

NOTE
Use the temperature control dial to
increase the air flow temperature and
defog the glass more quickly.

6-14

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 15 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Air-Conditioning System

▼ Sunlight/Temperature Sensor
The fully automatic air conditioner
function measures inside and outside
temperatures, and sunlight. It then sets
temperatures inside the passenger
compartment accordingly. Don’t obstruct
the sensor.

Sunlight sensor

Interior temperature sensor

6-15

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 16 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Aerial Operating Tips for Audio


▼ Manual Type
System
The manual aerial must be raised and ▼ Radio Reception
lowered by hand. AM characteristics
AM signals bend around such things as
buildings or mountains and bounce off the
ionosphere. Therefore, they can reach
longer distances than FM signals. Because
of this, two stations may sometimes be
picked up on the same frequency at the
same time.

Ionosphere

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the aerial, retract Station 1 Station 2
it before entering a car wash facility or
FM characteristics
passing beneath a low overhead
clearance. An FM broadcast range is usually about
40—50 km (25—30 miles) from the
source. Because of extra coding needed to
break the sound into two channels, stereo
FM has even less range than monaural
(non-stereo) FM.

FM Station

40—50 km
(25—30 miles)

6-16

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 17 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Signals from an FM transmitter are Flutter/Skip noise


similar to beams of light because they do
Signals from an FM transmitter move in
not bend around corners, but they do
straight lines and become weak in valleys
reflect. Unlike AM signals, FM signals
between tall buildings, mountains, and
cannot travel beyond the horizon.
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes
Therefore, FM stations cannot be received
through such an area, the reception
at the great distances possible with AM
conditions may change suddenly,
reception.
resulting in annoying noise.
Ionosphere

FM wave
AM wave

FM wave

100—200 km (60—120 miles)


Atmospheric conditions can also affect Weak signal noise
FM reception. High humidity will cause In suburban areas, broadcast signals
poor reception. However, cloudy days become weak because of distance from
may provide better reception than clear the transmitter. Reception in such fringe
days. areas is characterised by sound breakup.
Multipath noise
Since FM signals can be reflected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both
the direct signal and the reflected signal at
the same time. This causes a slight delay
in reception and may be heard as a broken
sound or a distortion. This problem may
also be encountered when in close
Strong signal noise
proximity to the transmitter.
This occurs very close to a transmitter
tower. The broadcast signals are
extremely strong, so the result is noise and
Reflected wave sound breakup at the radio receiver.
Direct

6-17

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 18 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Station drift noise Handling the cassette tape player


When a vehicle reaches the area of two The following precautions should be
strong stations broadcasting at similar observed.
frequencies, the original station may be • Do not spill any liquid on the audio
temporarily lost and the second station
system.
picked up. At this time there will be some
noise from this disturbance.
Station 1 Station 2
88.1 MHz 88.3 MHz

• Do not insert any objects, other than


cassette tape, into the slot.
▼ Operating Tips for Cassette Tape
Player
Cleaning the cassette tape player
The tape head, capstans, and pinch rollers
will gather oxide residue from cassette
tapes. This can cause weak or wavering
sounds and damage to the cassette tapes
and player. Use a good quality head-
cleaning tape or a liquid cleaner cassette • If the cassette tape is loose, it may
tape to remove it. produce poor sound or performance
Should the unit not operate normally, during playback. Use a pencil or
consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer. something similar to remove any slack.
Never attempt to repair it or insert a
screwdriver or anything else.

• Only cassette tapes that play no longer


than 90 minutes should be used.
Cassette tape exceeding 90 minutes are
thin and may easily break.

6-18

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 19 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

• Do not leave a cassette tape in the tape • When inserting the MD, make sure the
player slot when not in use. Remove it MD label is facing up, and the MD is
completely to permit the slot door to oriented to the insertion slot in the
close and to protect the mechanism direction of the arrow. If not inserted
from dust. correctly, the MD will be ejected, or
may remain stuck in the MD deck.
• Store cassette tapes away from extreme
heat, magnetic fields, and direct
sunlight. Protect the exposed cassette
tape from dirt and damage. Store
cassette tapes in their original cases or
other protective cases.
• Insert only cassette tapes into the slot.
If objects other than cassette tapes are
inserted, they may damage the player.
▼ Operating Tips for Mini Disc • Do not touch the internal part of the
MD. If the MD shutter is slid open for
(MD) Player no reason, it may be broken.
• The MD player has been designed to
play MDs bearing the identification
logo as shown. No other MDs can be
played.

• Store MDs in their cases and away


from direct sunlight.
• Do not insert fingers or foreign objects
in the MD insertion slot as it could
damage the MD deck.

6-19

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 20 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Operating Tips for CD Player/In- • The CD revolves at high speed within


Dash CD Changer the unit. Defective (cracked or badly
bent) CDs should never be used.
Condensation phenomenon
Immediately after turning on the heater
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or optical
components (prism and lens) in the CD
player/changer may become clouded with
condensation. At this time, the CD will
eject immediately when placed in the unit.
A clouded CD can be corrected simply by
wiping it with a soft cloth. Clouded
optical components will clear naturally in • Do not use non-conventional discs such
about an hour. Wait for normal operation as heart-shaped, octagonal discs, etc.
to return before attempting to use the unit. The CD player/changer could be
damaged.
Handling the CD player/In-dash CD
changer
The following precautions should be
observed.
• Do not spill any liquid on the audio
system.

• A new CD may have rough edges on its


inner and outer perimeters. If a disc
with rough edges is used, proper
setting will not be possible and the CD
player/changer will not play the CD.
Remove the rough edges in advance by
using a ball-point pen or pencil as
• Do not insert any objects, other than shown below. To remove the rough
CDs, into the slot. edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil
against the inner and outer perimeter of
the CD.

6-20

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 21 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

• When driving over uneven surfaces, the • Dust, finger smudges, and dirt can
sound will jump. decrease the amount of light reflected
from the signal surface, thus affecting
sound quality. If the CD should
become soiled, gently wipe it with a
soft cloth from the centre of the CD to
the edge.
• Do not use record sprays, antistatic
agents, or household spray cleaners.
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and
thinner can also damage the surface of
• The CD player/changer has been the CD and must not be used. Anything
designed to play CDs bearing the that can damage, warp, or fog plastic
identification logo as shown. No other should never be used to clean CDs.
discs can be played.
• CDs, like traditional audio records, are
made of plastic. To avoid warping,
keep the CDs in their cases and do not
store them where they will be exposed
to direct sunlight.
• The CD player/changer ejects the CD if
the CD is inserted upside down. Also
dirty and/or defective CDs may be
ejected.
• Be sure never to touch the signal
surface when handling the CDs. Pick • 8 cm (3 in) CDs and CD accessories
up a CD by grasping the outer edge or (e.g. 8 cm disc adapter) cannot be used
the edge of the hole and the outer edge. in the CD player/changer.
• Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD
player/changer.
• Do not insert any disc with a peel-off
or seal on it.

• Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.


Avoid scratching the reverse side (the
side without a label).

6-21

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 22 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

6-22

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 23 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Audio Set

CD Player In-dash CD Changer

TYPE A TYPE B

Cassette Tape Player Mini Disc (MD) Player

Illustration is of a representative audio unit.

Antitheft System (European model with Radio Data System, Australia model) .................. 6-24
Power/Volume/Sound Controls ............................................................................................. 6-28
Clock ..................................................................................................................................... 6-30
Operating the Radio (Type A) ............................................................................................... 6-32
Operating the Radio (Type B) ............................................................................................... 6-34
Operating the Cassette Tape Player ....................................................................................... 6-38
Operating the Mini Disc (MD) Player ................................................................................... 6-42
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player ............................................................................. 6-44
Operating the In-Dash CD Changer ...................................................................................... 6-46
Error Indications .................................................................................................................... 6-49

6-23

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 24 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Antitheft System (European model with Radio Data System, Australia model)

Antitheft indicator light Display

Type A

Type B

Auto memory button Channel preset buttons

To deter theft of your vehicle’s audio unit,


it has an integrated antitheft system. The CAUTION
system is designed to accept a code
number that makes the unit inoperable if it Read and understand all code setting
is stolen. procedures before attempting to input
This system will be activated if the power your personal code number.
source is ever disconnected from or in any The personal code number is only
way interrupted to the audio unit. When shown on the audio unit display while
the system is activated, the audio system it is being set. Once it is input and
will not operate when reconnected to a stored by the unit, it is never again
power supply, and "CODE" will flash on displayed. For that reason, be very
the display until the correct code number careful to immediately record your
is input. If the antitheft system is personal code number, and never let an
activated, reset the unit. unauthorised person set a code.

NOTE
Although the audio unit is operable
without the code number being set, we
recommend that you set your personal
code number.

6-24

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 25 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Setting procedure Press 1 for the first digit, 2 for the second,
3 for the third, and 4 for the last digit. For
1. Begin with the audio unit off and the
example, if your number is 2547, press 1
ignition switch is in the ACC position.
twice, 2 five times, 3 four times, and 4
2. Press the auto memory button ( ) seven times. If the display goes off while
and the channel preset button 6 inputting, begin from Step 1.
simultaneously for about 2 seconds
until "CODE" is displayed. NOTE
Type A Type B We recommend that your code number
be associated with something easy to
remember. You should also file a copy
of the code numbers with your
important papers.

5. While the code number is displayed,


press the auto memory button ( )
3. Again press the auto memory button and the channel preset button 6 for
( ) and the channel preset button about 2 seconds and "CODE" begins to
6 while "CODE" is displayed (within flash. After about 5 seconds, "CODE"
10 seconds). The display will exhibit will disappear. This indicates the
bars. system is set.

Type A Type B Type A Type B

4. While the bars are displayed, input


your personal code number by pressing
channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, and 4.

6-25

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 26 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Cancelling code number 5. While the code number is displayed,


press the auto memory button ( )
1. Begin with the audio unit off and the
and the channel preset button 6 for
ignition switch is in the ACC position.
about 2 seconds and "CODE" appears.
2. Press the auto memory button ( )
and the channel preset button 6 Type A Type B
simultaneously for about 2 seconds
until "CODE" is displayed.

Type A Type B

6. After 5 seconds, "CODE" will


disappear. This indicates the code
number is cancelled.

3. Again press the auto memory button NOTE


( ) and the channel preset button
6 simultaneously while "CODE" is If ERR (error) appears on the display,
displayed (within 10 seconds). The begin from Step 4.
display will exhibit bars.
Changing code number
Type A Type B
To change the code number, first cancel
the number. Then set the new number by
following the setting procedures.

4. While the bars are displayed, input the


current code number as described in
setting procedure Step 4. (2547, for
example).

6-26

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 27 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

System activation 3. Press the auto memory button ( )


and the channel preset button 6 for
When the power supply is disconnected or
about 2 seconds. "CODE" will be
interrupted, the antitheft system is
flashed for 5 seconds, then disappear to
activated and the unit is rendered
indicate that the system is operable. If
inoperative. In this condition, when power
ERR (error) appears, begin from Step
is again supplied, "CODE" will be
1.
displayed and flash unless the correct
code number is input. Type A Type B
To deactivate the antitheft system and
reset the audio unit, input your personal
code number.
1. Press the auto memory button ( )
and the channel preset button 6
simultaneously for about 2 seconds
until bars are displayed.

Type A Type B CAUTION


• Three consecutive errors will
activate the antitheft system, and the
audio unit will be completely
inoperable and ERR (error) will
flash. When this happens, the unit
must be replaced by an Authorised
2. While the bars are displayed, input the Mazda at the owner’s expense.
code number as described in the setting • Do not allow an unauthorised
procedure. person to attempt to input a code
number.

6-27

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 28 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Power/Volume/Sound Controls

Display

Audio control knob Power/Volume knob

Power ON/OFF Volume adjustment


Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or To adjust the volume, turn the power/
ON position. volume knob.

Press the power/volume knob to turn the Turn the power/volume knob to the right
audio system on. to increase volume, to the left to decrease
Press the power/volume knob again to it.
turn the audio system off.

NOTE
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio
system on for a long period when the
engine is not running.

6-28

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 29 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Audio sound adjustment


NOTE
1. Press the audio control knob to select
bass, mid-range, treble, fade or balance About 5 seconds after selecting any
control. The selected function will be mode, the volume function will be
indicated. automatically selected. To reset bass,
mid-range, treble, fade, and balance,
press the audio control knob for 2
seconds. The unit will beep and
"CLEAR" will be displayed.

2. Turn the audio control knob to adjust


the selected functions as follows:

Indication Turn Left Turn Right

Decrease bass Increase bass

Decreasemid- Increasemid-
range range

Decreasetreble Increasetreble

Shift the Shift the


soundto the soundto the
front rear
Shift the Shift the
soundto the soundto the
left right

6-29

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 30 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Clock

Display Clock button

Hour set
button

Minute set
button

Setting the time Exact hour adjustment


The clock can be set at any time when the 1. To set the exact hour, press the clock
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON button ( ) for about 2 seconds
position. until a beep is heard.
The clock’s current time will flash.
1. To adjust the time, press the clock
button ( ) for about 2 seconds 2. Press the clock button ( ) again
until a beep is heard. and the time will be adjusted as
The clock’s current time will flash. follows:
(Example)
2. To advance the hours, press the hour
12:01—12:29→12:00
set button ( ). To advance the
12:30—12:59→1:00
minutes, press the minute set button
( ) while the time is flashing.
NOTE
3. Press the clock button ( ) again
to start the clock. If the power supply to the unit is
interrupted (if the fuse blows or the
vehicle’s battery is disconnected), the
clock will need to be reset.

6-30

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 31 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Changing the display mode


The display on the unit can be changed by
pressing the clock button ( ). This
alternates the display between time and
audio. When the clock mode has been
selected, the time will be displayed.

NOTE
If audio operation is selected while the
time mode is on, the selected audio
mode will be displayed for 10 seconds,
then the display will revert to the time
mode.

6-31

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 32 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Operating the Radio (Type A)

Display
Band selector buttons

Scan button
Seek tuning
button
Auto memory
button

Manual tuning knob Channel preset buttons

Radio ON Tuning
Press a band selector button ( or The radio has the following tuning
) to turn the radio on. methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset
channel, and Auto memory tuning. The
Band selection
easiest way to tune stations is to set them
Choose AM by pressing the AM button on preset channels.
( ) and FM by pressing the FM1/2
button ( ). NOTE

The selected mode will be indicated. If If the power supply is interrupted (fuse
FM stereo is being received, "ST" will be blows or the battery is disconnected),
displayed. the preset channels will be cancelled.

NOTE Manual tuning

If the FM broadcast signal becomes Turning the manual tuning knob will
weak, reception automatically changes change the frequency higher or lower.
from STEREO to MONO for reduced
noise, and the "ST" indicator will go
out.

6-32

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 33 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Seek tuning
NOTE
Pressing the seek tuning button
( , ) will cause the tuner to seek a If the power supply is interrupted (fuse
higher or lower frequency automatically. blows or the battery is disconnected),
the preset channels will be cancelled.
NOTE
Auto memory tuning
If you continue to press and hold the
button, the frequency will continue This is especially useful when driving in
changing without stopping. an area where the local stations are not
known. Additional AM/FM stations can
be stored without disturbing the
Scan tuning
previously set channels.
Press the scan button ( ) to
automatically sample strong stations. Press and hold the auto memory button
Scanning stops at each station for about 5 ( ) for about 2 seconds until a beep
seconds. To hold a station, merely press is heard; the system will automatically
the scan button ( ) again during this scan and temporarily store up to 6 stations
interval. with the strongest frequencies in each
selected band in that area.
Preset channel tuning
The 6 preset channels can be used to store After scanning is completed, the station
6 AM and 12 FM stations. with the strongest frequency will be tuned
and its frequency displayed.
1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1,
Press and release the auto memory button
or FM2. Tune to the station you want.
( ) to recall stations from the auto-
2. Depress a channel preset button for stored stations. One stored station will be
about 2 seconds until a beep is heard. selected each time; its frequency and
The preset channel number and station channel number will be displayed.
frequency will be displayed. The
station is now held in the memory. NOTE
3. Repeat this operation for the other If no stations can be tuned after
stations and bands you want to store. scanning operations, "A" will be
To tune one in the memory, select AM, displayed.
FM1, or FM2 and then press its
channel preset button. The station
frequency and the channel number will
be displayed.

6-33

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 34 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Operating the Radio (Type B)

Display Traffic announcement


Band selector buttons button

Seek tuning
button
Programme-
type button

Alternative frequency
button
Auto memory button Channel preset buttons Manual tuning knob

Radio ON
NOTE
Press a band selector button ( or
) to turn the radio on. If the FM broadcast signal becomes
weak, reception automatically changes
Band selection from STEREO to MONO for reduced
Press the AM button ( ) to change MW noise, and the "ST" indicator will go
and LW. out.
Press the FM1/2 button ( ) to change
FM1 and FM2. Tuning
The radio has the following tuning
The selected mode will be indicated. If
methods: Manual, Seek, Preset channel,
FM stereo is being received, "ST" will be
and Auto memory tuning. The easiest way
displayed.
to tune stations is to set them on preset
channels.

NOTE
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse
blows or the battery is disconnected),
the preset channels will be cancelled.

6-34

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 35 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Manual tuning Auto memory tuning


Turning the manual tuning knob will This is especially useful when driving in
change to the frequency higher or lower. an area where the local stations are not
known.
Seek tuning
Pressing the seek tuning button Press and hold the auto memory button
( , ) will cause the tuner to seek a ( ) for about 2 seconds until a beep
higher or lower frequency automatically. is heard; the system will automatically
scan and temporarily store up to 6 stations
NOTE with the strongest frequencies in each
selected band in that area.
If you continue to press and hold the
button, the frequency will continue After scanning is completed, the station
changing without stopping. with the strongest frequency will be tuned
and its frequency displayed. Press and
Preset channel tuning release the auto memory button ( )
to recall stations from the auto-stored
The 6 preset channels can be used to store
stations. One stored station will be
6 MW, 6 LW and 12 FM stations.
selected each time; its frequency and
channel number will be displayed.
1. To set a channel first select MW, LW,
FM1, or FM2. Tune to the station you NOTE
want.
If no stations can be tuned after
2. Depress a channel preset button for scanning operations, "A" will be
about 2 seconds until a beep is heard. displayed.
The preset channel number and station
frequency will be displayed. The
station is now held in the memory.
3. Repeat this operation for the other
stations and bands you want to store.
To tune one in the memory, select MW,
LW, FM1, or FM2 and then press its
channel preset button. The station
frequency and the channel number will
be displayed.

NOTE
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse
blows or the battery is disconnected),
the preset channels will be cancelled.

6-35

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 36 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Radio Data System (RDS) To set the TA broadcast volume:


Alternative frequency (AF) 1. Press and hold the traffic
announcement button ( ) for about 2
AF functions on FM stations. Press the
seconds while in FM mode.
alternative frequency button ( ) to turn
it on and "AF" will be displayed. When an 2. Turn the power/volume knob to adjust
RDS station is received, the station’s call the volume.
sign will then be displayed.
Programme-type information (PTY)
If you wish to continue a regional Some FM stations transmit programme-
programme, press the alternative type codes. This code enables alternative
frequency button ( ) for 2 seconds until stations transmitting the same
a beep is heard and "REG ON" will be programme-type code to be found
displayed. To cancel it, press the quickly.
alternative frequency button ( ) again
for 2 seconds until a beep is heard and Press the Programme-type information
"REG OFF" will be displayed. button ( ) while in FM mode. "PTY"
will be displayed. To choose a programme
Traffic announcement (TA)
type, press a channel preset button (1~6)
Press the traffic announcement button with previously stored programme types,
( ) while in any mode other than MW/ or press the seek tuning button ( ) to
LW. The unit will then switch to TA stand- scan programme types. The unit will then
by mode and "TA" and "TP" will be switch to PTY stand-by mode.
displayed. If the currently tuned radio
station is not broadcasting a traffic When a programme-type broadcast is
announcement (TA) the unit will seek one received while in PTY stand-by mode, it
in another network and the system will will supercede any other mode except
return to stand-by mode. MW/LW. During a programme-type
broadcast, press the Programme-type
When a TA broadcast is received, the TA information button ( ) to end the
broadcast will supercede other radio, tape, broadcast and return to the previous
MD or CD play. "TRA INFO" will be mode.
displayed for about 7 seconds. During a
TA broadcast, press the traffic To scan for programme types, press and
announcement button ( ) to end the hold the seek tuning button ( ) for
broadcast and return to the previous about 2 seconds until a beep is heard. The
mode. To cancel the TA stand-by mode, unit will scan for broadcasts, if none are
press the traffic announcement button found, the unit will return to the
( ) while the unit is in TA stand-by previously tuned band and PTY stand-by
mode. mode.
To cancel PTY stand-by mode, press the
Programme-type information button
( ) for about 2 seconds and "PTY"
will disappear from the display.

6-36

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 37 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

To store programme types in channel


preset buttons:
1. Press the seek tuning button ( )
and select a programme type.
2. While the programme type is
displayed, press a channel preset button
for about 2 seconds.
Emergency broadcast
When an emergency broadcast is
received, the emergency broadcast will
supercede other radio (FM), tape MD or
CD play. "ALARM" will be displayed.
When the emergency broadcast ends, the
unit will return to the previous mode.

6-37

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 38 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Operating the Cassette Tape Player

Cassette tape play button


Display Fast-forward button

APC button:
(next programme)

(one being
played)
Rewind
button

Repeat button Cassette tape eject button


Dolby NR button Programme button

Cassette tape insert Playing


Insert the cassette tape into the slot, open Press the cassette tape play button
edge to the right and cassette tape will ( ) to start playing when a
begin play and "TAPE" will be displayed. cassette tape is in the unit. If there isn’t a
At the end of the cassette tape, the unit cassette tape in the unit when the cassette
automatically reverses cassette tape play. tape play button ( ) is pressed,
When is lit, the cassette tape’s top side "NO TAPE" will flash on and off in
is playing. When is lit, the bottom side sequence.
is on.

NOTE
When a metal tape is inserted, the
player will automatically compensate
for it and "MTL" will be displayed.

6-38

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 39 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Dolby noise reduction Reversing


When using a tape with Dolby NR*, push Press the programme button ( ) to
the Dolby NR button ( ). The change cassette tape-playing direction.
symbol will be displayed. To play a tape
without Dolby NR, push the button once NOTE
again.
* Noise reduction system manufactured When the cassette tape ends, the unit
under license from Dolby Laboratories automatically reverses play.
Licensing Corporation.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are Automatic programme control (APC)
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
APC is used to find the beginning of
Licensing Corporation.
either the next programme or the one
Ejecting the cassette tape being played.
Press the cassette tape eject button ( ) to
Press the APC button ( ) to the
eject the cassette tape.
beginning of the next selection.
Press the APC button ( ) to the
NOTE beginning of the one being played. To
The cassette tape can be ejected when stop this operation and play the cassette
the ignition switch is in the OFF tape, press the button again.
position.
If APC detects 15 seconds of blank space
it will automatically advance the tape to
Fast-forward/Rewind
the next selection.
Press the fast-forward button ( ) to
fast-forward. NOTE
Press the rewind button ( ) to rewind.
To stop this operation and play the APC may not operate properly if
cassette tape, press the button again. • A tape was recorded at a low level.
NOTE • A tape has long, silent intervals.
• A tape is a live recording.
When the cassette tape ends during
fast forward or rewind, it automatically • A tape has very short intervals of
stops and starts playing. less than 3 seconds.

6-39

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 40 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Repeat play
This operation makes it possible to listen
to a selection repeatedly.

Press the repeat button ( ) during play.


The current selection playing will be
repeated ("RPT" will be displayed).
Press the repeat button ( ) once again
to cancel repeat play.

NOTE
RPT may not operate properly if
• A tape was recorded at a low level.
• A tape has long, silent intervals.
• A tape is a live recording.
• A tape has very short intervals of
less than 3 seconds.

6-40

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 41 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

6-41

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 42 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Operating the Mini Disc (MD) Player

MD play button
Display Fast-forward button

Scan Track up
button button

Track down
button
MD slot Reverse
button
Display MD eject
button button

Repeat button Random button


MD display

Inserting the MD Press and hold the reverse button ( )


to reverse through a track at high speed.
Insert the MD, label-side up with the
arrow pointed to the slot. The auto- Track search
loading mechanism will set the MD and
Press the track up button ( ) once to
begin play. There will be a short lapse
skip forward to the beginning of the next
before play begins while the player reads
track.
the digital signals on the MD.
Press the track down button ( ) once to
Playing skip back to the beginning of the current
track.
Press the MD play button ( ) to
start playing when a MD is in the unit. Music scan(Type A)
Ejecting the MD This feature helps to find a programme by
playing about the first 10 seconds of each
Press the MD eject button ( ) to eject the
track.
MD.
Fast-forward/Reverse Press the scan button ( ) during play
to start scan play operation (the track
Press and hold the fast-forward button
number will flash).
( ) to advance through a track at high
speed.

6-42

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 43 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Press the scan button ( ) once again


to cancel scan play. NOTE
If there is no song or disc title recorded
NOTE on the MD, "NO TITLE" will be
displayed.
If the unit is left in scan, normal play
will resume where scan was selected.
Long disc or song titles
Repeat play When disc or song titles exceed 10 letters
or numerals, press the display button
This feature makes it possible to listen to
( ) to display the remaining part of the
a selection repeatedly.
title.
Press the repeat button ( ) during play.
The current selection will be repeated
("RPT" will be displayed).
Press the repeat button ( ) once again
to cancel repeat play.
Random play
This feature allows the MD player to
randomly select the order of the songs.

Press the random button ( ) during


play. The next selection will be randomly
selected ("RDM" will be displayed).
Press the random button ( ) once
again to cancel random play.
Changing the MD display
To change the MD display during MD
play, press and hold the display button
( ) for about half a second to advance
through each of the following displays:

Song title Disc title No display

6-43

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 44 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player

CD slot CD play button CD eject button


Disc-in indicator Display Fast-forward button

Scan Track up
button button

Track down
button

Reverse
button

Random button
Repeat button

Inserting the CD Fast-forward/Reverse


Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up. Press and hold the fast-forward button
The auto-loading mechanism will set the ( ) to advance through a track at high
CD and begin play. There will be a short speed.
lapse before play begins while the player Press and hold the reverse button ( )
reads the digital signals on the CD. to reverse through a track at high speed.
The disc-in indicator will illuminate and
Track search
the track number will be displayed.
Press the track up button ( ) once to
Playing
skip forward to the beginning of the next
Press the CD play button ( ) to start track.
playing when a CD is in the unit. Press the track down button ( ) once to
skip back to the beginning of the current
Ejecting the CD
track.
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.

6-44

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 45 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Music scan(Type A)
This feature helps to find a programme by
playing about the first 10 seconds of each
track.

Press the scan button ( ) during play


to start scan play operation (the track
number will flash).
Press the scan button ( ) once again
to cancel scan play.

NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal play
will resume where scan was selected.

Repeat play
This feature makes it possible to listen to
a selection repeatedly.

Press the repeat button ( ) during play.


The current selection will be repeated
("RPT" will be displayed).
Press the repeat button ( ) once again
to cancel repeat play.
Random play
This feature allows the CD player to
randomly select the order of the songs.

Press the random button ( ) during


play. The next selection will be randomly
selected ("RDM" will be displayed).
Press the random button ( ) once
again to cancel random play.

6-45

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 46 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Operating the In-Dash CD Changer

Channel preset buttons CD slot


Display CD play button CD eject button

Load button

Scan Track up
button button

Auto memory Track down


button button
Disc down Fast-forward
button button

Repeat button Reverse button


Disc up button Random button Power/Volume knob

Inserting the CD Normal insertion


The CD must be label-side up when 1. Press the load button ( ).
inserting. The auto-loading mechanism
2. When "In" is displayed, insert the CD.
will set the CD and begin play. There will
be a short lapse before play begins while Inserting CDs into desired tray number
the player reads the digital signals on the
1. Press and hold the load button ( )
CD.
for about 2 seconds until a beep is
The disc number and the track number
heard.
will be displayed.
2. Press the channel preset button for the
NOTE desired tray number within 5 seconds
after the beep is heard.
A CD cannot be inserted while the
display reads "WAIT". A beeping 3. When "In" is displayed, insert the CD.
sound can be heard during this waiting
time. Simultaneously pressing the NOTE
power/volume knob and the load
The CD cannot be inserted to the
button ( ) for about 2 seconds will desired tray number if the number is
turn this beeping sound ON or OFF. already occupied.

6-46

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 47 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Multiple insertion Multiple ejection


1. Press and hold the load button ( ) 1. Press and hold the CD eject button ( )
for about 2 seconds until a beep is for about 2 seconds until a beep is
heard. heard.
2. When "In" is displayed, insert the CD. 2. Wait 5 seconds or press the CD eject
button ( ) again within 5 seconds
3. When "In" is displayed again, insert
after the beep is heard.
the next CD.
3. Pull out the CD, then the next CD will
NOTE be ejected.

The first-inserted CD will be played NOTE


automatically when:
• CDs will be ejected starting with the
• No CD is inserted within 15
one with the lowest number.
seconds after "In" is displayed.
• All CDs in the tray will be ejected
• The CD trays are full.
continuously.
Ejecting the CD • CDs can be ejected when the
ignition switch is off. Press and hold
Normal ejection the CD eject button ( ) for about 2
1. Press the CD eject button ( ). The seconds and all CDs will eject.
disc number and "OUT" will be
displayed. Playing
2. Pull out the CD. Press the CD play button ( ) to start
playing when a CD is in the unit.
NOTE Fast-forward/Reverse
When the CD is ejected during play, Press and hold the fast-forward button
the next CD will be played ( ) to advance through a track at high
automatically. speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( )
Ejecting CDs from desired tray number to reverse through a track at high speed.
1. Press and hold the CD eject button ( ) Track search
for about 2 seconds until a beep is
Press the track up button ( ) once to
heard.
skip forward to the beginning of the next
2. Press the channel preset button for the track.
desired CD number within 5 seconds Press the track down button ( ) once to
after the beep is heard. skip back to the beginning of the current
track.
3. Pull out the CD.

6-47

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 48 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

Disc search
Press the disc up button ( ) to skip
forward to the beginning of the next CD.
Press the disc down button ( ) to
skip back to the beginning of the previous
CD.
Music scan (Type A)
This feature helps to find a programme by
playing about the first 10 seconds of each
track.

Press the scan button ( ) during play


to start scan play operation (the track
number will flash).
Press the scan button ( ) once again
to cancel scan play.

NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal play
will resume where scan was selected.

Repeat play
This feature makes it possible to listen to
a selection repeatedly.

Press the repeat button ( ) during play.


The current selection will be repeated
("RPT" will be displayed).
Press the repeat button ( ) once again
to cancel repeat play.
Random play
This feature allows the CD player to
randomly select the order of the songs.

Press the random button ( ) during


play. The next selection will be randomly
selected ("RDM" will be displayed).
Press the random button ( ) once
again to cancel random play.

6-48

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 49 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Error Indications
If you see an error indication on the display, find the cause in the chart. If you cannot clear
the error indication, take the vehicle to an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

Indication Cause Solution


Insert the MD properly. If the error indication
CHECK MD MD is inserted upside down does not disappear, consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer
Insert another MD properly. If the error
CHECK MD MD is defective indication does not disappear, consult an
Authorised Mazda Dealer
Insert the CD properly. If the error indication
CHECK CD CD is inserted upside down does not disappear, consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer
CHECK CD CD is defective Check the CD for scratches or soiling

6-49

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 50 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

▼ Changing the Source


Audio Control Lever
Operation

AM reception type
Press the end of the audio control lever to
change the audio source (AM radio>FM1
NOTE
radio>FM2 radio>Cassette tape or MD
Mazda installed this system to help player>CD player or CD
you avoid being too distracted using changer>cyclical).
audio controls on the instrument panel. MW and LW reception type
Always make safe driving your first
priority. Press the end of the audio control lever to
change the audio source (LW radio>MW
▼ Adjusting the Volume radio>FM1 radio>FM2 radio>Cassette
tape or MD player>CD player or CD
Move the audio control lever up to changer>cyclical).
increase the volume. Move the lever down
to decrease the volume. ▼ SELECT Switch

6-50

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 51 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Audio System

When listening to the radio


Pull the audio control lever to seek a
higher frequency automatically.
When playing a cassette tape
Pull the audio control lever, release, and it
will advance to the next selection.
When playing a CD or MD
Pull the audio control lever to skip to the
next track.

6-51

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 52 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

Sunvisors Interior Lights


When you need a sunvisor, lower it for use ▼ Illuminated Entry System
in front or swing it to the side.
When the switch is in the DOOR position,
the overhead light comes on for:
Sunvisor
• about 30 seconds after the driver’s door
is unlocked and the ignition key is
removed.
• about 15 seconds after all doors are
closed.
• about 15 seconds after the key is
removed from the ignition.

The light also goes out when:


▼ Vanity Mirrors • the ignition switch is turned to the ON
To use the vanity mirror, lower the position and all doors are closed.
sunvisor. • the driver’s door is locked.

NOTE
If any door is left opened, the light
goes out after about 5 minutes.
The light turns on again when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, or when any door is opened
after all doors have been closed.

6-52

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 53 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

▼ Overhead Lights ▼ Map Lights

Type A
The map lights are switched on or off by
pressing the switches.
OFF
DOOR Type A

ON

Map light Map light


Type B
OFF
DOOR Type B
ON

Map light
Map light
Type C

OFF
DOOR
ON

OFF Light off


• Light on when any door is open
DOOR • Light on or off when the
illuminated entry system is on
ON Light on

6-53

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 54 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

▼ Luggage Compartment Light


Clock

ON
ON
OF

Clock
F

OFF

OFF Light off To set the hour


ON Light on when the liftgate is open
Press the H (hour) button to change the
hour.
To set the minutes
Press the M (minute) button to change the
minutes.

Press the RESET button to clear minutes.


The clock will be set on the hour.

6-54

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 55 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

If the RESET button is pressed from


12:01 to 12:29, for example, the time will Lighter
be reset to 12:00. If pressed from 12:30 to
12:59, the time will be reset to 1:00. The ignition switch must be in the ACC or
ON position.
(Example) Press the lighter in and release it. When
12:01—12:29→12:00 ready for use, it automatically pops out.
12:30—12:59→1:00

NOTE
• When the power is disconnected,
the time is automatically set at 1:00.
• If the vehicle has an audio system,
the clock is built into the audio
system (page 6-30).

CAUTION
• Don’t touch the metal part of the
lighter, you may burn yourself.
• Don’t hold the lighter in because it
will overheat.
• Don’t use the lighter socket for
plug-in accessories such as shavers
and coffee pots. They may damage
it or cause electrical failure. Use
only a genuine Mazda lighter or the
equivalent.
• If the lighter doesn’t pop out within
30 seconds, remove it to prevent
overheating.

6-55

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 56 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

To remove, open the cover and pull the


Ashtray ashtray upward.
Type A
CAUTION
Don’t use the ashtray for rubbish. You
might start a fire.

▼ Front
To remove, open and push down on the
lock spring.

Type B

▼ Rear

CAUTION
Using an ashtray removed from its
fixed position or not completely
inserted is dangerous. Cigarettes could
roll around or spill out of the ashtray
into the vehicle and start a fire.
Moreover, cigarette stubs will not
extinguish themselves completely even
if the ashtray lid is closed. Only use a
rear ashtray in its fixed position, and
make sure it is completely inserted.

6-56

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 57 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

▼ Front
Cup Holder
Type A
To use, pull the tray out.
WARNING
Using Cup Holder:
Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids
while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. If the contents spill, you
could be scalded. Never use a cup
holder to hold hot liquids while the
vehicle is moving.

Don’t Put Anything Other Than Cups


or Drink-cans in Cup Holder:
Putting objects other than cups or
drink-cans in a cup holder is Type B
dangerous. To use the cup holder, push the release
During sudden braking or button.
manoeuvring, occupants could be hit
and injured, or objects could be
thrown around the vehicle, causing
interference with the driver and the
possibility of an accident. Only use a
cup holder for cups or drink-cans.

CAUTION
To reduce the possibility of injury in an
accident or a sudden stop, keep a cup
holder closed when not in use.

6-57

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 58 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

▼ Rear If an ashtray is equipped, pull it out and


use the hole for an additional cup holder.
Type A
1. Raise the pull-up seatback tray.
(page 2-7)
2. Push down the cup retainer bar.

Cup retainer bar

Type C

Pull-up seatback tray

Type B
The rear cup holders are in the side-trim
of both the left and right doors.

Cup holder
Cup holder

6-58

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 59 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

▼ Front Console
Storage Compartments
Pull out the storage tray.

WARNING
Open Storage Boxes:
Driving with the storage boxes open is
dangerous. To reduce the possibility
of injury in an accident or a sudden
stop, keep the storage boxes closed
when driving.

CAUTION
In hot weather, don’t leave ▼ Under Seat Tray
combustible materials or objects which Pull the tray forward.
will deform in extreme heat such as
lighters and glasses in the vehicle. Front-passenger seat

▼ Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull the latch
toward you.
If the door has a lock, insert the key and
turn it clockwise to lock, anticlockwise to
unlock.
Unlock

Lock

6-59

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 60 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

▼ Cargo Securing Loops 7-Passenger model


The four loops are available in the 7-
WARNING passenger model after folding down the
third-row seat (page 2-28).
Not Securing Cargo: ▼ Cargo Sub-Compartment
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous. The cargo could move or 5-Passenger model (With conventional
be crushed in sudden braking or a spare tyre)
collision and cause injury. Make sure Lift the cover.
the luggage is secured before driving.

Use the loops in the luggage compartment


to secure cargo with a rope or net. The
tensile strength of the loops is 196N (20
kgf, 44 lbf). Do not apply excessive force
to the loops as it will damage them.
5-Passenger model

7-Passenger model
To access the forward cargo sub-
compartment, fold the third-row seat
(page 2-28).

7-Passenger model

6-60

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 61 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Interior Comfort

Interior Equipment

To open the rear cargo sub-compartment,


pull the strap and open the cover. Accessory Socket
The ignition switch must be in the ACC or
ON position.
Only use genuine Mazda accessories or
the equivalent requiring no greater than
12V—10A.

To use the side cargo sub-compartments,


pull the straps and open the covers.

CAUTION
To prevent accessory socket damage or
electrical failure, pay attention to the
following;
• Don’t use accessories that require
more than 12V—10A.
• Don’t use accessories that are not
genuine Mazda accessories or the
equivalent.
• Close the cover when the accessory
socket is not in use.
• Correctly insert the plug into the
accessory socket.

NOTE
To prevent discharging the battery,
don’t use the socket for long periods
with the engine off or idling.

6-61

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 62 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

6-62

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

7 In Case of an Emergency

Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.

Parking in an Emergency ........................................................... 7- 2


Parking in an Emergency ......................................................... 7- 2

Flat Tyre ....................................................................................... 7- 3


Spare Tyre and Tool Storage ................................................... 7- 3
Changing a Flat Tyre ............................................................... 7- 7

Overheating ................................................................................. 7-12


Overheating ............................................................................. 7-12

Emergency Starting .................................................................... 7-14


Starting a Flooded Engine (Petrol Engine) .............................. 7-14
Jump-Starting .......................................................................... 7-14
Push-Starting ........................................................................... 7-16
Running Out of Fuel (Diesel Engine) ...................................... 7-17

Emergency Towing ...................................................................... 7-18


Towing Description ................................................................. 7-18
Towing Hooks .......................................................................... 7-19

7-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Parking in an Emergency

Parking in an Emergency
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway.

The hazard warning lights warn other


drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.

Hazard warning flasher switch

Depress the hazard warning switch and all


four direction indicators will flash at once.

NOTE
• The direction indicators don’t work
when the hazard warning lights are
on.
• Check local regulations about the
use of hazard warning lights while
the vehicle is being towed. They
may forbid it.

7-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Flat Tyre

Spare Tyre and Tool Storage


Spare tyre and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.
5-Passenger model (With temporary spare tyre)

Jack handle Spare tyre Tool bag Jack

5-Passenger model (With conventional spare tyre, Type A)

Jack handle Spare tyre Tool bag Jack

7-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Flat Tyre

5-Passenger model (With conventional spare tyre, Type B)

Spare tyre Tool bag Jack handle Jack

7-Passenger model

Spare tyre Tool bag Jack handle Jack

7-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Flat Tyre

▼ Jack ▼ Spare Tyre


To remove the jack Your Mazda has either a conventional or a
temporary spare tyre.
1. Remove the cover.
Conventional
The conventional spare is the same type
and size as the tyres provided on the four
wheels as original equipment. Use it as a
spare or in normal tyre rotation (page 8-
34).
Temporary
The temporary spare is lighter and smaller
than a conventional tyre, and is designed
only for emergency use and should be
used only for VERY short periods.
2. Turn the wing bolt anticlockwise. Temporary spares should NEVER be used
for long drives or extended periods.

Wing bolt WARNING


Driving with a Temporary Spare Tyre
on Ice or Snow:
Driving with a spare tyre on the front
(driving) wheels on ice or snow is
dangerous. Handling will be affected.
Jack
You could lose control of the vehicle
and have an accident. Put the spare
tyre on the rear axle and move a
To secure the jack regular tyre to the front.
Perform the removal procedure in reverse.

7-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Flat Tyre

To remove the spare tyre


CAUTION (5-Passenger model)
To avoid damage to the temporary Turn the tyre hold-down bolt
spare or to the vehicle, observe the anticlockwise with the wheel brace.
following precautions:
• Don’t exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).
• Avoid driving over obstacles. Also,
don't drive through an automatic car
wash. This tyre’s diameter is
smaller than a conventional tyre’s;
so the ground clearance is reduced
about 25 mm (1 in).
• Don’t use a tyre chain on this tyre
because it won’t fit properly. Wheel brace
• Don’t use your temporary spare on
any other vehicle; it has been
designed only for your Mazda. Tyre clamp Bolt
• Use only one temporary spare tyre
on your vehicle at the same time.

(7-Passenger model)
1. Fold the third-row seat (page 2-28).

7-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Flat Tyre

2. Remove the cover and the cargo sub-


compartment. Changing a Flat Tyre

NOTE

Cover If the following occurs while driving, it


could indicate a flat tyre.
• Steering becomes difficult.
• The vehicle begins to vibrate
excessively.
Cargo sub- • The vehicle pulls in one direction.
compartment
If you have a flat tyre, drive slowly to a
3. Turn the tyre hold-down bolt level spot that is well off the road and out
anticlockwise with the wheel brace. of the way of traffic to change the tyre.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of a
busy road is dangerous.

WARNING
Jacking a Vehicle:
Changing a tyre is dangerous if not
done properly. The vehicle can slip off
the jack and seriously injure
someone.
Wheel brace Be sure to follow the directions for
changing a tyre, and never get under
a vehicle that is supported only by a
Bolt jack.
Tyre clamp
Passenger in Vehicle Supported by a
Jack:
Allowing someone to remain in a
vehicle supported by a jack is
dangerous. The occupant could cause
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious
injury. Never allow anyone inside a
vehicle supported by a jack.

To secure the spare tyre


Perform the removal procedure in reverse.

7-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Flat Tyre

▼ Removing a Flat Tyre


NOTE
1. Pry off the wheel cover with the
Make sure the jack is well lubricated bevelled end of the wheel brace.
before using it.

1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-


way and firmly set the parking brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle in Park (P), a manual
transaxle in Reverse (R) or 1, and turn
off the engine.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
Wheel cover
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle Wheel brace
and away from the vehicle and traffic.
5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tyre
(page 7-3). NOTE

6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite Force the end of the wheel brace firmly
the flat tyre. When blocking a front between wheel and cover, or removal
wheel, place the block both in front and will be difficult.
behind the tyre. When blocking a rear
wheel, place the block both in front and
behind the tyre. CAUTION
Align the notch on the wheel cover
with the valve stem when installing it.

Notch

Tyre valve

Damage could occur during


installation if the wheel cover is not
properly aligned.

7-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 9 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Flat Tyre

2. Loosen the wheel nuts by turning them


anticlockwise one turn each, but don’t
remove any until the tyre has been
WARNING
raised off the ground. Incorrect Jacking Position:
Attempting to jack the vehicle in
positions other than those
recommended in this manual is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off
the jack and seriously injure or even
kill someone. Use only the front and
rear jacking positions recommended
in this manual.

Improper Jack:
Using a jack that isn’t designed for
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle
could slip off the jack and seriously
3. Place the jack under the jacking
injure someone. Use only the jack
position closest to the tyre being
provided with your Mazda.
changed.
Placing Objects Under the Jack:
Jacking the vehicle with an object
under the jack is dangerous. The jack
could slip and someone could be
seriously injured by the jack or the
falling vehicle. Never place objects
under the jack.

4. Insert the jack handle into the jack.


Jacking position

7-9

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 10 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Flat Tyre

5. Turn the jack handle clockwise and


raise the vehicle high enough so that
the spare tyre can be installed. Before
WARNING
removing the wheel nuts, make sure Removing Dirt and Grime from
your Mazda is firmly in position and Wheels, Hubs and Hub Bolts:
that it cannot slip or move. When changing or replacing a tyre,
not removing dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub
and hub bolts is dangerous. The
wheel nuts could loosen while driving
and cause the tyre to come off,
resulting in an accident. Make sure
the mounting surfaces of the wheel,
hub and wheel nuts are clean before
changing or replacing tyres.

2. Mount the spare tyre.


Jack handle
3. Install the wheel nuts with the bevelled
6. Remove the wheel nuts by turning edge inward; tighten them by hand.
them anticlockwise; then remove the
wheel.
▼ Mounting the Spare Tyre
1. Remove dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub, including the hub bolts, with a
cloth.

7-10

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 11 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Flat Tyre

WARNING WARNING
Don’t apply Oil or Grease to Wheel Loose Wheel Nuts:
Nuts, Bolts: Improperly or loosely tightened wheel
Applying oil or grease to wheel nuts nuts are dangerous. The wheel could
and bolts is dangerous. The wheel wobble or come off. This could result
nuts could loosen while driving and in loss of vehicle control and cause a
cause the tyre to come off, resulting in serious accident. Always securely and
an accident. In addition, wheel nuts correctly tighten the wheel nuts.
and bolts could be damaged if
tightened more than necessary. Do Metric Studs and Wheel Nuts:
not apply oil or grease to wheel nuts Because the wheel studs and wheel
and bolts and do not tighten the wheel nuts on your Mazda have metric
nuts beyond the recommended threads, using a non-metric nut is
tightening torque. dangerous. On a metric stud, it would
not secure the wheel and would
4. Turn the jack handle anticlockwise and damage the stud, which could cause
lower the vehicle. Use the wheel brace the wheel to slip off and cause an
to tighten the nuts in the order shown. accident. Be sure to reinstall the same
nuts you removed or replace them
with metric nuts of the same
configuration.

Incorrect Tyre Air Pressure:


Driving on tyres with incorrect air
pressure is dangerous. Tyres with
incorrect pressure could affect
handling and result in an accident.
Don’t drive with any tyres that have
incorrect air pressure. When you
check the regular tyres’ air pressure,
check the spare tyre, too.
If you’re unsure of how tight the nuts
should be, have them inspected at a 5. Store the damaged tyre in the luggage
service station. compartment.
Have the damaged tyre repaired as
Nut tightening torque: soon as possible.
l

N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf) 90—120 (9—12, 65—87)


NOTE
To prevent the jack and tool from
rattling, store them properly.

7-11

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 12 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Overheating

4. Check whether coolant or steam is


Overheating escaping from under the bonnet or
from the engine compartment.
If the temperature gauge indicates
overheating, the vehicle loses power, or If steam is coming from the engine
you hear a loud knocking or pinging compartment:
noise, the engine is probably too hot. Don’t go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine. Then turn the ignition
If this happens: switch to the ON position without
starting the engine.
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and The radiator cooling fans will start to
park off the right-of-way. cool the engine.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic If neither coolant nor steam is
transaxle in park (P), a manual escaping:
transaxle in neutral. Open the bonnet and idle the engine
Apply the parking brake. until it cools. If this doesn’t lower the
3. Turn off the air conditioner. temperature, stop the engine and let it
cool.

WARNING
Steam from Overheated Engine:
Steam from an overheated engine is
dangerous. The escaping steam could
seriously burn you. Open the bonnet
ONLY after steam is no longer
escaping from the engine.

7-12

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 13 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Overheating

5. Check the coolant level.


If it’s low, look for leaks in the radiator
hoses and connections, heater hoses
WARNING
and connections, radiator, and water Cooling System Caps:
pump. When the engine and radiator are
If you find a leak or other damage, or if hot, scalding coolant and steam may
coolant is still leaking, stop the engine shoot out under pressure and cause
and call an Authorised Mazda Dealer. serious injury. Don’t remove either
cooling system cap when the engine
Petrol engine and radiator are hot.
Cooling system cap

CAUTION
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the cooling
system inspected. The engine could be
seriously damaged unless repairs are
Coolant reservoir
made.

Diesel engine
Cooling system cap
Coolant reservoir

If you find no problems, the engine is


cool, and no leaks are obvious, carefully
add coolant as required (page 8-18).

7-13

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 14 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Emergency Starting

Starting a Flooded Engine Jump-Starting


(Petrol Engine) Jump-starting is dangerous if done
If the engine fails to start, it may be incorrectly. So follow the procedure
flooded (excessive fuel in the engine). carefully. If you feel unsure about jump-
starting, we strongly recommend that you
When the engine is cold have a competent service technician do
the work.
Follow this procedure:
WARNING
1. Depress the accelerator all the way and
hold it there. Battery-Related Explosion:
Flames and sparks near open battery
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas,
position and hold it there—for up to 10 produced during normal battery
seconds. If the engine starts, release the operation, could ignite and cause the
key and accelerator immediately battery to explode. An exploding
because the engine will suddenly rev battery can cause serious burns and
up.
injuries. Keep all flames, including
3. If the engine fails to start, crank it cigarettes, and sparks away from
without using the accelerator—for up open battery cells.
to 10 seconds.
Low Fluid Level or Frozen Battery:
When the engine is warm
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one
The above procedure should not be with a low fluid level is dangerous. It
performed because it will make starting may rupture or explode, causing
even more difficult. If the engine is serious injury.
unusually difficult to restart when it is Don’t jump-start a frozen battery or
warm (fails to start after repeated attempts one with a low fluid level.
without depressing the accelerator),
depress the accelerator about halfway to
start it. CAUTION
Use only a 12 V booster system. You
can damage a 12 V starter, ignition
system, and other electrical parts
beyond repair with a 24 V power
supply (two 12 V batteries in series or
a 24 V motor generator set).

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12 V


and that its negative terminal is
grounded.

7-14

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 15 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Emergency Starting

2. If the booster battery is in another


Diesel engine
vehicle, don’t allow the vehicles to
touch. Turn off the engine of the
vehicle with the booster battery and all
unnecessary electrical loads in both Discharged
vehicles. battery
Jumper
3. Connect the jumper leads in the exact cables
sequence as in the illustration. Booster battery
• Connect one end of a lead to the Connect cables in
positive terminal on the discharged numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
battery (1).
• Attach the other end to the positive
terminal on the booster battery (2). WARNING
• Connect one end of the other lead to
the negative terminal of the booster Connecting to Negative Terminal:
battery (3). Connecting the end of the second lead
to the negative ( ) terminal of the
• Connect the other end to a solid, discharged battery is dangerous.
stationary, exposed metallic point A spark could cause the gas around
(for example, the engine hanger) the battery to explode and injure
away from the discharged battery someone. Connect the lead to a point
(4). away from the battery.
Petrol engine Connecting Jumper Lead to a Moving
Part:
Connecting a jumper lead near or to a
Discharged moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is
battery dangerous. The lead could get caught
when the engine starts and cause
Booster battery serious injury. Never connect a
Jumper
leads jumper lead to or near any part that
Connect leads in moves.
numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and run it a few minutes. Then start the
engine of the other vehicle.
5. When finished, carefully disconnect
the leads in the reverse order described
in Step 3.

7-15

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 16 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Emergency Starting

Push-Starting NOTE
If the battery is low, the following may
occur and the engine won’t start:
WARNING
• The glow plug won’t operate
Towing a Vehicle to Start It: (temperature lower than about 20°C
Towing a vehicle to start it is (68°F) ).
dangerous. The vehicle being towed
• The fuel-cut valve stays closed.
could surge forward when its engine
starts, causing the two vehicles to
collide. The occupants could be
injured. Never tow a vehicle to start it.

Petrol engine
You can’t start a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle by pushing it.

CAUTION
You shouldn’t push-start a vehicle that
has a manual transaxle. It can damage
the emission control system.

Diesel engine
If the battery isn’t dead, you may push-
start a vehicle, but carefully follow these
steps:
1. Turn off all unneeded electrical
accessories.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into
third before push starting.
4. Slowly release the clutch pedal when
speed reaches about 15 km/h (9 mph),
then depress the accelerator halfway
until the engine starts.

7-16

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 17 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Emergency Starting

Running Out of Fuel CAUTION


(Diesel Engine)
Don’t try starting the engine for more
If your vehicle runs out of fuel, add fuel, than 30 seconds at a time. Doing so,
pump the priming pump several times, could damage the starter. If the engine
and try to restart it. Because air can get doesn’t start on the first try wait about
into fuel lines when a vehicle runs out of 10 seconds before trying again.
fuel, your engine may take longer to start.

Priming pump

Left-hand drive
model

Priming pump

Right-hand drive model

If the engine doesn’t start the first time,


try starting it several more times. If it still
doesn’t start, contact an Authorised
Mazda Dealer.

7-17

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 18 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Emergency Towing

Towing Description CAUTION


We recommend that towing be done only Don't tow the vehicle pointed
by an Authorised Mazda Dealer or a backward with driving wheels on the
commercial tow-truck service. ground. This may cause internal
damage to the transaxle.
Proper lifting and towing are necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Government and local laws must be
followed.

A towed vehicle usually should have its


front wheels off the ground. If excessive
damage or other conditions prevent this,
use wheel dollies.

CAUTION
Don’t tow with sling-type equipment.
Wheel dollies This could damage your vehicle. Use
wheel-lift or flatbed equipment.

When towing with the rear wheels on the


ground, release the parking brake.

If towing service is not available in an


emergency, the vehicle may be towed with
all four wheels on the ground using the
towing hook at the front of the vehicle.
Only tow the vehicle on paved surfaces
for short distances at low speeds.

7-18

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 19 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Emergency Towing

CAUTION Towing Hooks


Follow these instructions when towing
the vehicle with all wheels on the CAUTION
ground.
• The towing hook should be used in
1. Shift to neutral. an emergency (to get the vehicle out
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC of a ditch or a snow bank, for
position. example).
• When using the towing hooks,
3. Release the parking brake.
always pull the lead or chain in a
Remember that power assist for the straight direction with respect to the
brakes and steering will not be hook. Apply no sideways force.
available when the engine is not
running.
NOTE
When towing with chain or wire rope,
wrap the chain or wire rope with a soft
cloth near the bumper to prevent
damage to the bumper.

▼ Towing Hook-Front

7-19

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 20 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

In Case of an Emergency

Emergency Towing

▼ Towing Hook-Rear

Without rear under spoiler

With rear under spoiler

7-20

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

8 Maintenance and Care

How to keep your Mazda in top condition.

Introduction ................................................................................. 8- 2
Introduction ............................................................................. 8- 2

Scheduled Maintenance .............................................................. 8- 3


Scheduled Maintenance ........................................................... 8- 3

Owner Maintenance .................................................................... 8-11


Owner Maintenance Schedule ................................................. 8-11
Owner Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 8-12
Engine Compartment Overview .............................................. 8-13
Engine Oil ................................................................................ 8-14
Engine Coolant ........................................................................ 8-18
Brake/Clutch Fluid .................................................................. 8-19
Power Steering Fluid ............................................................... 8-20
Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) ........................................... 8-21
Window and Headlight Washer Fluid ...................................... 8-23
Body Lubrication ..................................................................... 8-23
Air Filter .................................................................................. 8-24
Fuel Filter (Diesel Engine) ...................................................... 8-26
Wiper Blades ........................................................................... 8-27
Battery ..................................................................................... 8-30
Tyres ........................................................................................ 8-32
Light Bulbs .............................................................................. 8-36
Fuses ........................................................................................ 8-42
Emission Control Maintenance (Australia) ............................. 8-46

Appearance Care ......................................................................... 8-49


How to Minimize Environmental Paint Damage ..................... 8-49
Exterior Care ........................................................................... 8-51
Interior Care ............................................................................ 8-54

8-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Introduction

Introduction
Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle
when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.

If you’re unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable
and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.

For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been performed as
prescribed.

A claim against a warranty will not qualify if it results from lack of maintenance and not
from defective material or authorised Mazda workmanship.

8-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance

Scheduled Maintenance

NOTE
• After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the
recommended intervals.
• As the result of visual examination or functional measurement of a system’s
operation (performance), correct, clean, or replace as required. (Inspect, and if
necessary replace the air filter)

Emission control and related systems


The ignition and fuel systems are highly important to the emission control system and to
efficient engine operation. Don’t tamper with them.
All inspections and adjustments must be made by a qualified technician. We strongly
recommend that all servicing related to these systems be done by an Authorised Mazda
Dealer.

8-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance

(Europe)
I : Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.
(Oil-permeated air filter cannot be cleaned using the air-blow method.)
R : Replace
C : Clean
Maintenance Interval Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144
(Number of months
or kilometres (miles), ×1000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
whichever comes
first) ×1000 miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 99 108
PETROL ENGINE
Engine valve clearance Inspect every 90,000 km (54,000 miles)
FP engine*1 Replace every 90,000 km (54,000 miles)
Engine timing belt Inspect at 90,000 km (54,000 miles)
FS engine*2 Replace every 150,000 km(90,000miles)
Idle speed I I I I I I
Spark plugs I I I I
Air filter*6 I I R I I R I I R I I R
Evaporative system I I I
DIESEL ENGINE
Engine valve clearance I I I I I I
(Finland,
Sweden, Replace every 75,000 km (45,000 miles)
Engine timing belt Norway)*3
Others*1 Replace every 90,000 km (54,000 miles)
Fuel filter R R R R
Air filter*6 C C R C C R C C R C C R
PETROL and DIESEL ENGINE
Drive belts*4 I I I I I I I I I I I I
*5 R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil
Engine oil filter*5 R R R R R R R R R R R R
*1
Replacement of the timing belt is required at every 90,000 km {54,000 miles}. Failure to replace the timing
belt may result in damage to the engine.
*2
Replacement of the timing belt is required at every 150,000 km {90,000 miles}. If the vehicle is operated in
cold districts { below -18 degrees C (0 degrees F) }, replace the timing belt at 90,000 km {54,000 miles}.
Failure to replace the timing belt may result in damage to the engine.
*3
Replacement of the timing belt is required at every 75,000 km {45,000 miles}. Failure to replace the timing
belt may result in damage to the engine.
*4
Also inspect and adjust the power steering and air conditioner drive belts, if installed.
*5
If the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions, change the engine oil and the engine oil filter
every 10,000 km {6,000 miles} or shorter.
a) Driving in dusty conditions.
b) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
c) Driving for long period in cold temperatures or driving regularly at short distance only.
*6
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, inspect and if necessary, replace the air filter more
often than the recommended intervals.

8-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance

I : Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.


R : Replace
T : Tighten
L : Lubricate
Maintenance Interval Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144
(Number of months
or kilometres (miles), ×1000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
whichever comes
first) ×1000 miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 99 108
PETROL and DIESEL ENGINE
Cooling system (Including coolant level
I I I I I I
adjustment)
Replace at first 4 years or 90,000 km (54,000 miles) ;
Engine coolant
after that, every 2 years
Fuel lines and hoses I I I I I I
E.G.R. system I I I
Battery electrolyte level and specific
I I I I I I I I I I I I
gravity
*7 I I I I I I I I I I I I
All electrical system
Head light alignment I I I I I I
Brake and clutch pedals I I I I I I I I I I I I
Clutch fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake fluid*8 I R I R I R I R I R I R
Parking brake I I I I I I I I I I I I
Power brake unit and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid and lines I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation and gear housing I I I I I I
Steering linkage tie rod ends and arms I I I I I I
Manual transaxle oil R R
Automatic transaxle fluid level I I I I I I
Front and rear suspension and ball joints I I I I I
Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I
Exhaust system heat shields I I I I I I
Wheel nuts T T T T T T T T T T T T
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T T T T T T T T T T
Body condition (for rust, corrosion and
I I I I I I I I I I I I
perforation)
Tyres (including spare tyre)
I I I I I I I I I I I I
(with inflation pressure adjustment)
Hinges and catches L L L L L L L L L L L L
Road test I I I I I I I I I I I I
Cabin air filter R R R R R R R R R R R R
*7
This is a full function check of electrical systems such as lights, wiper and washer systems (including wiper
blades), and power windows.
*8
If the brakes are used extensively (for example, continuous hard driving or mountain driving) or if the vehicle
is operated in extremely humid climates, change the brake fluid annually.

8-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance

(Israel)
I : Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.
(Oil-permeated air filter cannot be cleaned using the air-blow method.)
R : Replace
Maintenance Interval Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144
(Number of months or ×1000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
kilometres (miles),
whichever comes first) ×1000 miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 99 108
Engine valve clearance Inspect every 90,000 km (54,000 miles)
Engine timing belt*1 Replace every 90,000 km (54,000 miles)
Idle speed I I I I I I
Fuel filter R R
Spark plugs I I I I
Evaporative system I I I
Drive belts*2 I I I I I I I I I I I I
Engine oil*3 R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil filter*3 R R R R R R R R R R R R
Cooling system (Including coolant level
I I I I I I
adjustment)
Replace at first 4 years or 90,000 km (54,000 miles) ;
Engine coolant
after that, every 2 years
Air filter*4 I I R I I R I I R I I R
Fuel lines and hoses I I I I I I
E.G.R. system I I I
Battery electrolyte level and specific
I I I I I I I I I I I I
gravity
All electrical system*5 I I I I I I I I I I I I
Head light alignment I I I I I I
Brake pedals I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake fluid*6 I R I R I R I R I R I R
Parking brake I I I I I I I I I I I I
Power brake unit and hoses I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid and lines I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation and gear housing I I I I I I
*1
Replacement of the timing belt is required at every 90,000 km {54,000 miles}. Failure to replace the timing
belt may result in damage to the engine.
*2
Also inspect and adjust the power steering and air conditioner drive belts, if installed.
*3
If the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions, change the engine oil and the engine oil filter
every 10,000 km {6,000 miles} or shorter.
a) Driving in dusty conditions.
b) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
c) Driving for long period in cold temperatures or driving regularly at short distance only.
*4
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, inspect and if necessary, replace the air filter more
often than the recommended intervals.
*5
This is a full function check of electrical systems such as lights, wiper and washer systems (including wiper
blades), and power windows.
*6
If the brakes are used extensively (for example, continuous hard driving or mountain driving) or if the vehicle
is operated in extremely humid climates, change the brake fluid annually.

8-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance

I : Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.


R : Replace
T : Tighten
L : Lubricate
Maintenance Interval Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144
(Number of months or ×1000 km 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 180
kilometres (miles),
whichever comes first) ×1000 miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 99 108
Steering linkage tie rod ends and arms I I I I I I
Automatic transaxle fluid level I I I I I I
Front and rear suspension and ball joints I I I I I
Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I
Exhaust system heat shields I I I I I I
Wheel nuts T T T T T T T T T T T T
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T T T T T T T T T T
Body condition (for rust, corrosion and
Inspect annually
perforation)
Tyres (including spare tyre)
I I I I I I I I I I I I
(with inflation pressure adjustment)
Hinges and catches L L L L L L L L L L L L
Road test I I I I I I I I I I I I
Cabin air filter (if installed) R R R R R R R R R R R R

8-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance

(Except Europe, Israel)


I : Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.
(Oil-permeated air filter cannot be cleaned using the air-blow method.)
R : Replace
C : Clean
Maintenance
Interval Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
(Number of
months or ×1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
kilometres (miles),
whichever comes ×1000 miles 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
first)
PETROL ENGINE
Engine valve clearance Inspect every 100,000 km (60,000 miles) or 60 months
Idle speed I I I I I I I I
except
Australian R R R R
Fuel filter model
Australian
R R
model
Spark plugs R R R R R
Air filter*4 I R I R I R I R
Evaporative system I I I I I I I I
DIESEL ENGINE
Engine valve clearance I I I I I I I I
Fuel filter R R R R
Air filter*4 C R C R C R C R
PETROL and DIESEL ENGINE
Drive belts*1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Engine timing belt*2 Replace every 100,000 km (60,000 miles)
Engine oil*3 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil filter*3 R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Cooling system (Including
I I I I I I I I
coolant level adjustment)
Engine coolant Replace every 2 years
Fuel line and hoses I I I I I I I I
E.G.R. system I I I I I I I I
except
Battery electrolyte Australian I I I I I I I I
level and specific model
gravity Australian
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
model
*1
Also inspect and adjust the power steering and air conditioner drive belts, if installed.
*2
Replacement of the timing belt is required at every 100,000 km {60,000 miles}. Failure to replace the timing
belt may result in damage to the engine.
*3
If the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions, change the engine oil and the engine oil filter
more often than recommended intervals.
a) Driving in dusty conditions.
b) Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
c) Driving for long period in cold temperatures or driving regularly at short distance only.
*4
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, inspect and if necessary, replace the air filter more
often than the recommended intervals.

8-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 9 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance

I : Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary.


R : Replace
T : Tighten
L : Lubricate
Maintenance
Interval Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
(Number of
months or ×1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
kilometres (miles),
whichever comes ×1000 miles 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
first)
PETROL and DIESEL ENGINE
Brake and clutch pedals I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and
I I I I I I I I
connections
Brake fluid*5 I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R
Clutch fluid I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Parking brake I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Power brake unit and hoses I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Drum brakes (if installed) I I I I I I I I
Power steering fluid and lines I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation and gear
I I I I I I I I
housing
Steering linkage tie rod ends and
I I I I I I I I
arms
Manual transaxle oil R R
Automatic transaxle fluid level I I I I I I I
Automatic transaxle fluid R R R
Front and rear suspension and
I I I I
ball joints
Driveshaft dust boots I I I I
Exhaust system heat shields I I I I
Wheel nuts T T T T T T T T
Bolts and nuts on chassis and
T T T T T T T T
body
All electrical system*6 I I I I I I I I
Head light alignment I I I I I
Cabin air filter (if installed) R R R R R R R R
Body condition (for rust,
corrosion and perforation) Inspect annually
(except Australian model)
Tyres(including spare tyre)(with
I I I I I I I I
inflation pressure adjustment)
Hinges and catches L L L L L L L L
Road test I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
*5
If the brakes are used extensively (for example, continuous hard driving or mountain driving) or if the vehicle
is operated in extremely humid climates, change the brake fluid annually.
*6
This is a full function check of electrical systems such as lights, wiper and washer systems (including wiper
blades), and power windows.

8-9

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 10 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Scheduled Maintenance

▼ Approximate Service Times (Australia)

Maintenance Number of months or km (miles), whichever comes first


Interval
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
×1000 Km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
Maintenance
Item (×1000 Miles) (6) (12) (18) (24) (30) (36) (42) (48) (54) (60) (66) (72) (78) (84) (90) (96)
Approximate time to complete
this maintenance service in 1.4 2.2 1.7 2.7 2.1* 2.8 1.4 2.8 1.7 4.3* 1.4 3.3 1.4 2.2 2.4* 2.8
HOURS

*Reduce by 0.7hrs for manual transaxle equipped vehicles.

8-10

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 11 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Owner Maintenance Schedule


▼ Routine Service
We highly recommend that these items be inspected at least every week.
• Engine Oil Level (page 8-14)
• Engine Coolant Level (page 8-18)
• Brake and Clutch Fluid Level (page 8-19)
• Washer Fluid Level (page 8-23)
• Battery Maintenance (page 8-31)
• Tyre Inflation Pressure (page 8-33)

8-11

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 12 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Owner Maintenance Precautions


Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions
only for items easy to perform.

As explained in the Introduction (page 8-2), several procedure can be done only by a
qualified service technician with special tools.

Improper do-it yourself maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty
coverage. For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the
vehicle. If you’re unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an
Authorised Mazda Dealer.

There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Please
dispose of your waste carefully and with due regard to the environment.

We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorised
Mazda Dealer.

WARNING
Maintenance Procedures:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You can
be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedure. If you lack
sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by a qualified technician.

Running the Engine:


Working under the bonnet with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even
more dangerous when you wear jewellery or loose clothing.
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.
Therefore, if you must run the engine while working under the bonnet, make certain
that you remove all jewellery (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and
all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or
cooling fan, with may turn on unexpectedly.

Electrical Fan and Engine Inspection:


Inspecting the engine with the ignition switch in the ON position is dangerous. The
cooling fan could come on unexpectedly even when the engine isn’t running. You
could be seriously injured by the fan. Turn the ignition switch off and remove the key
from the ignition switch when you inspect the engine.

8-12

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 13 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Engine Compartment Overview

Petrol engine

Engine oil dipstick Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir


Automatic transaxle fluid-level dipstick
(only for automatic transaxle)
Power steering fluid reservoir

Battery

Fuse block

Windscreen washer
fluid reservoir

Engine oil-filler cap Engine coolant


Cooling system cap Air filter reservoir
Diesel engine

Engine oil-filler cap Fuel filter


Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir

Engine coolant Battery


reservoir

Fuse block

Windscreen washer
fluid reservoir
Air filter

Engine oil dipstick


Cooling system cap Power steering fluid reservoir

8-13

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 14 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Engine Oil

NOTE
Changing the engine oil should be done by an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

8-14

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 15 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Recommended Oil
The maintenance intervals can only be supported by the use of following oils (page 8-3).
Europe
Petrol engine
Temperature Range SAE Viscosity Numbers
–30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Grade Recommended oils
–20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
API SJ
5W-30
ACEA A1 or A3 Mazda genuine DEXELIA
API SJ oil
10W-40
ACEA A3
Diesel engine
Temperature Range SAE Viscosity Numbers
–30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Grade Recommended oils
–20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
API CF
5W-30
ACEA B1 or B3 Mazda genuine DEXELIA
API CF oil 10W-40
ACEA B3
Except Europe
Petrol engine
Temperature Range SAE Viscosity Numbers
–30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Grade
–20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
40
30
20W-20 20
10W-30
API SG, SH, SJ or SL
10W-40
ILSAC GF- or GF-
10W-50
20W-40 15W-40
20W-50 15W-50
5W-20 5W-30
Diesel engine
Temperature Range SAE Viscosity Numbers
–30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Grade
–20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
5W-30
API CD, CE or CF-4
10W-30

8-15

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 16 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Engine oil viscosity, or thickness, has an effect on fuel economy and cold-weather
operation (starting and oil flow).
Low-viscosity engine oils can provide improved fuel economy and cold-weather
performance.
But high-temperature weather conditions require higher-viscosity engine oils for
satisfactory lubrication.

When choosing an oil, consider the temperature range your vehicle will operate in before
the next oil change.
Then select the recommended viscosity from this chart above.

CAUTION
Using oils of viscosity besides those recommended for specific temperature ranges
could result in engine damage.

8-16

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 17 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Inspecting Engine Oil Level


1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level
CAUTION
surface. Don’t add engine oil over F. This may
2. Warm up the engine to normal cause engine damage.
operating temperature.
6. Make sure the O-ring is positioned
3. Turn it off and wait 5 minutes for the properly before reinserting the
oil to return to the sump. dipstick.
4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully. The distance between L and F on the
dipstick represents the following:
Petrol engine Petrol engine
L (US qt, Imp qt) 1.0 (1.05, 0.87)
Diesel engine
L (US qt, Imp qt) 1.2 (1.26, 1.05)

F
Full NOTE
OK
Secure the engine oil dipstick in the
Low clip after replacing it.
L

Diesel engine
F
Full Clip
OK
L
Low

5. Pull it out again and examine the level.


It’s OK between L and F.
But if it’s near or below L, add enough
oil to bring the level to F.

8-17

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 18 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Engine Coolant Petrol engine

▼ Inspecting Coolant Level

WARNING
Hot Engine:
A hot engine is dangerous. If the
engine has been running, parts of the
engine compartment can become very
hot. You could be burned. Don’t
inspect the coolant system or add Diesel engine
coolant when the engine is hot.

NOTE
Changing the coolant should be done
by an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

Inspect the antifreeze protection and


coolant level in the coolant reservoir at
least once a year—at the beginning of the
winter season—and before travelling
If the coolant reservoir is empty, consult
where temperatures may drop below
an Authorised Mazda Dealer.
freezing.
If it’s at or near LOW, add enough coolant
to the coolant reservoir to provide
Inspect the condition and connections of
freezing and corrosion protection and to
all cooling system and heater hoses.
bring the level to FULL.
Replace any that are swollen or
deteriorated.
CAUTION
The coolant should be at full in the
radiator and between the FULL and LOW Radiator coolant will damage paint.
marks on the coolant reservoir when the Rinse it off quickly.
engine is cool.
Do not overfill.
If new coolant is required frequently,
consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

8-18

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 19 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Adding Brake/Clutch Fluid


Brake/Clutch Fluid
▼ Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid WARNING
Level
The brakes and clutch draw fluid from the Spilled Brake Fluid:
same reservoir. Spilled brake fluid is dangerous. If it
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir gets in your eyes, they could be
regularly. It should be kept at MAX. seriously injured. If this happens,
The level normally drops with immediately flush your eyes with
accumulated distance, a condition water and get medical attention.
associated with wear of brake and clutch Brake fluid spilled on a hot engine
linings. If it is excessively low, have the could cause a fire. Be careful not to
brake/clutch system inspected by an spill brake fluid on yourself or on the
Authorised Mazda Dealer. engine.

Low Brake/Clutch Fluid Levels:


Low brake/clutch fluid levels are
dangerous. Low levels could signal
brake lining wear or a brake system
leak. Your brakes could fail and cause
an accident. If you find a low fluid
level, have the brakes and clutch
inspected.

If the fluid level is low, add fluid until it


Tank seal reaches MAX.
Before adding fluid, thoroughly clean the
area around the cap.

8-19

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 20 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

CAUTION Power Steering Fluid


• Do not add excessive force with ▼ Inspecting Power Steering Fluid
your hand to the brake/clutch fluid Level
reservoir cap. Excessive force on
the cap could damage the tank seal.
CAUTION
• Brake and clutch fluid will damage
painted surfaces. If brake or clutch To avoid damage to the power steering
fluid does get on a painted surface, pump, don’t operate the vehicle for
wipe it off immediately. long periods when the power steering
fluid level is low.
• Using nonspecified brake and clutch
fluids (page 10-7) will damage the
systems. Mixing different fluids NOTE
will also damage them.
If the brake/clutch system Use specified power steering fluid
frequently requires new fluid, (page 10-7).
consult an Authorised Mazda
Dealer. Petrol engine
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir at
each engine oil change with the engine off
and cold. Add fluid if necessary; it does
not require periodic changing.

The level must be kept between MIN and


MAX.

Visually examine the lines and hoses for


leaks and damage.

8-20

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 21 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

If new fluid is required frequently, consult


an Authorised Mazda Dealer. Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Diesel engine (ATF)
Inspect the fluid level at each engine oil ▼ Inspecting Automatic Transaxle
change. Add fluid if necessary; it does not Fluid Level
require periodic changing.
The automatic transaxle fluid level should
be inspected regularly. Measure it as
described below.
Loosen
The volume of fluid changes with the
Tighten temperature. Fluid must be checked at idle
without driving at normal operating
temperature.

Full CAUTION
OK
Low • Low fluid level causes transaxle
slippage. Overfilling can cause
The level must be kept between the Full foaming, loss of fluid, and transaxle
and Low marks. malfunction.
Visually examine the lines and hoses for • Use specified fluid (page 10-7). A
leaks and damage. nonspecified fluid could result in
transaxle malfunction and failure.
1. Park on a level surface, well off the
right-of-way, and set the parking brake 1. Park on a level surface and set the
firmly. parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off the engine and allow it to cool. 2. Idle the engine about two minutes.
3. Remove the filler cap and attached Push down on the brake pedal.
dipstick. 3. Move the shift lever through all ranges
4. Wipe them clean and put them back. and set it at P.
5. Remove again and inspect the level.
6. It must be between Full and Low. Add
fluid if necessary.

Don’t overfill.
If new fluid is required frequently, consult
an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

8-21

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 22 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

WARNING CAUTION
• Use the cold scale only as a
Sudden Vehicle Movement:
reference.
Shifting the shift lever without first
depressing the brake pedal is • If outside temperature is lower than
dangerous. The vehicle could move about 20°C (70°F), start the engine
suddenly and cause an accident. and inspect the fluid level after the
Make sure the brake pedal is applied engine reaches operating
before shifting the shift lever. temperature.
• If the vehicle has been driven for an
4. With the engine still idling, pull out the extended period at high speeds or in
dipstick, wipe it clean, and put it back. city traffic in hot weather, inspect
5. Pull it out again. the level only after stopping the
The proper fluid level is marked on the engine and allowing the fluid to
dipstick as follows. cool for 30 minutes.

Fully insert the dipstick. When adding


fluid, inspect with the dipstick to make
sure it doesn’t pass full.

NOTE
Full Inspect both sides of the dipstick for
A
Low Full accurate reading.
B
Low

Fluid hot scale A


When the vehicle has been driven and the
fluid is at normal operating temperature,
about 65°C (150°F), the level must be
between Full and Low.
Fluid cold scale B
When the engine has not been running
and the outside temperature is about 20°C
(70°F), the level must be between Full and
Low.

8-22

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 23 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Window and Headlight Body Lubrication


Washer Fluid All moving points of the body, such as
▼ Inspecting Washer Fluid Level door and bonnet hinges and locks, should
be lubricated each time the engine oil is
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on
WARNING locks during cold weather.

Substitute Washer Fluid: Make sure the engine bonnet’s secondary


Using radiator antifreeze as washer latch keeps the bonnet from opening when
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the the primary latch is released.
windscreen, it will dirty the
windscreen, affect your visibility, and
could result in an accident. Use only
windscreen washer fluid or plain
water in the reservoir.

Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid


reservoir; add fluid if necessary.

Float

The top of the float should be between


FULL and LOW.

Use plain water if washer fluid is


unavailable.
But use only washer fluid in cold weather
to prevent it from freezing.

8-23

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 24 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Replacing the Air Filter


Air Filter
NOTE
CAUTION If the vehicle is operated in very dusty
Don’t drive without an air filter. This or sandy areas, replace the filter more
could result in excessive engine wear. often than recommended intervals.

Petrol engine Petrol engine

A viscous paper air filter fits inside the air 1. Unfasten the clamps.
cleaner housing, as shown. It’s been
specially treated and should not be
cleaned and reused. Replace it when
necessary.
Diesel engine
This air filter may be cleaned with
compressed air and reused, or replaced,
depending on its condition. Unless it is
very dirty, simply shake it to remove
foreign particles. Each time you inspect it,
Clamp
wipe inside the air cleaner housing with a
damp cloth. 2. Lift off the air filter cover and remove
the filter.

Air filter

Air filter cover

8-24

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 25 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

3. Wipe inside the air cleaner housing 3. Remove the filter.


with a damp cloth.
4. Replace the filter.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Air filter
Replace the filter according to Scheduled
Maintenance (page 8-3).
Diesel engine
1. Unfasten the clamps.

Clamp
4. Wipe inside the air cleaner housing
with a damp cloth.
5. Clean or replace the filter.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Replace the filter according to Scheduled
Maintenance (page 8-3).

2. Slide the air filter assembly and lift it


off.

Air filter assembly

8-25

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 26 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Fuel Filter (Diesel Engine) Priming pump

The fuel filter acts as a sedimentor that Nuts


separates water from fuel.

Drain plug

Right-hand drive model

If 0.05 L (0.052 US qt, 0.044 Imp qt) of 5. After pumping out all the water, tighten
water accumulates in this filter, the the plug securely by hand. Use the
warning light will come on. priming pump to inspect for leaks.
6. Reinstall the fuel filter in the reverse
When it does, drain the water:
order of removal.
1. Remove the nuts.
2. Lift the fuel filter.
3. Loosen the drain plug on the underside
of the filter about one turn by hand.
4. Pump the priming pump at least 7
times to expel the water.

Priming pump

Nuts

Drain plug

Left-hand drive
model

8-26

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 27 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Replacing Windscreen Wiper


Wiper Blades Blades
When the wipers no longer clean well, the
CAUTION blades are probably worn or cracked.
Replace them.
Hot waxes applied by automatic car
washes have been known to affect the
cleanability of windows. CAUTION
Contamination of either the windscreen or To prevent damage to the wiper arms
the blades with foreign matter can reduce and other components, don’t move the
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are wipers by hand.
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments
used by some commercial car washes. 1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the blade
assembly to expose the plastic locking
If the blades are not wiping properly, clip.
clean the window and blades with a good Compress the clip and slide the
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse assembly downward; then lift it off the
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if arm.
necessary.
Push
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper blades,
don’t use petrol, paraffin, paint thinner,
or other solvents on or near them.

Plastic locking clip

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the windscreen,
don’t let the wiper arm fall on it.

8-27

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 28 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

2. Hold the end of the rubber and pull


until the tabs are free of the metal CAUTION
support.
• Don’t bend the stiffeners. You need
to use them again.
• If the metal stiffeners are switched,
Metal support the blade’s wiping efficiency could
be reduced.
So don’t use the driver’s side metal
stiffeners on the passenger’s side, or
vice versa.
Tab
• Be sure to reinstall the metal
stiffeners in the new blade rubber so
Pull out
that the curve is the same as it was
in the old blade rubber.
3. Remove the metal stiffeners from the
blade rubber and install them in new 4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
blades. Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse older of removal.

Stiffeners Tab

NOTE
Install the blade so that the tabs are
toward the bottom of the wiper arm.

8-28

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 29 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Replacing Rear Window Wiper 2. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it
Blade out of the blade holder.
When the wiper no longer cleans well, the
blade is probably worn or cracked.
Replace it.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arm
and other components, don’t move the
wiper by hand.

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the blade Pull out
assembly to expose the plastic locking
clip. 3. Remove the metal stiffeners from the
Compress the clip and slide the blade rubber and install them in new
assembly downward; then lift it off the blades.
arm.

Push

Stiffeners

Plastic locking clip

CAUTION
CAUTION Don’t bend the stiffeners. You need to
To prevent damage to the rear window, use them again.
don’t let the wiper arm fall on it.

8-29

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 30 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.


Then install the blade assembly in the Battery
reverse order of removal.

WARNING
Spilled Battery Fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULPHURIC
ACID which could cause serious
injuries, if it gets in your eyes or on
your skin. If this happens,
immediately flush your eyes with
water for 15 minutes or wash your
skin thoroughly and get medical
attention. Be careful not to get battery
fluid on yourself.

Battery-Related Explosion:
Flames and sparks near open battery
cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas,
produced during normal battery
operation, could ignite and cause the
battery to explode. An exploding
battery can cause serious burns and
injuries. Keep all flames, including
cigarettes, and sparks away from
open battery cells.

Children and Batteries:


Allowing children to play near
batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid
could cause serious injuries if it gets
in the eyes or on the skin. Always
keep batteries out of the reach of
children.

8-30

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 31 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Battery Maintenance ▼ Inspecting Electrolyte Level


A low level of electrolyte fluid will cause
the battery to discharge quickly.

To get the best service from a battery:


• Keep it securely mounted.
Inspect the electrolyte level at least once a
• Keep the top clean and dry. week. If it’s low, add enough distilled
• Keep terminals and connections clean, water to bring the level between upper and
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly lower level (illustration).
or terminal grease.
Don’t overfill.
• Rinse off spilled electrolyte
Examine the specific gravity of the
immediately with a solution of water
electrolyte with a hydrometer, especially
and baking soda.
during cold weather. If it’s low, recharge
• If the vehicle will not be used for an the battery.
extended time, disconnect the battery
leads and charge the battery every six
weeks.

8-31

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 32 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Battery Recharging
Tyres
• If the battery quickly discharges
because, for example, the lights were For reasons of proper performance, safety,
left on too long with the engine off, and better fuel economy, always maintain
slow-charge it as required by battery recommended tyre inflation pressures and
size and charger capacity. stay within the recommended load limits
and weight distribution.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it as
required by battery size and charger
WARNING
capacity. Using Different Tyre Types:
Driving your vehicle with different
NOTE types of tyres is dangerous. It could
cause poor handling and poor
• Before performing maintenance or braking; leading to loss of control.
recharging the battery, turn off all Except for the limited use of the
accessories and stop the engine. temporary spare tyre, use only the
• To disconnect the battery, remove same type tyres (radial, bias-belted,
the negative lead first. Install it last bias-type) on all four wheels.
when connecting the battery.
Using Wrong-Sized Tyres:
Using any other tyre size than what is
specified for your Mazda (page 10-9)
is dangerous. It could seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance, tyre
clearance, and speedometer
calibration. This could cause you to
have an accident. Use only tyres that
are the correct size specified for your
Mazda.

8-32

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 33 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Tyre Inflation Pressure Refer to the specification charts (page 10-


9).

WARNING NOTE

Incorrect Tyre Inflation: • Warm tyres normally exceed


Overinflation or underinflation of recommended pressures. Don’t
tyres is dangerous. Adverse handling release air from warm tyres to
or unexpected tyre failure could adjust the pressure.
result in a serious accident. Always
• Underinflation can cause reduced
inflate the tyres to the correct
fuel economy and poor sealing of
pressure (page 10-9).
the tyre bead, which will deform the
wheel and cause separation of tyre
Inspect all tyre pressures monthly from rim.
(including the spare) when the tyres are
cold. Maintain recommended pressures • Overinflation can produce a harsh
for the best ride, top handling, and ride and a greater possibility of
minimum tyre wear. damage from road hazards.
Keep your tyre pressure at the
Left-hand drive model correct levels. If one frequently
needs inflating, have it inspected.

Right-hand drive model

8-33

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 34 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Tyre Rotation ▼ Replacing a Tyre


To equalize tread wear, rotate the tyres
every 10,000 km (6,000 miles)/6,000 km* WARNING
(3,750 miles) or sooner if irregular wear
develops. During rotation, inspect them Worn Tyres:
for correct balance. Driving with worn tyres is dangerous.
*Except Europe, Australia
Reduced braking, steering, and
traction could result in an accident.
Always use tyres that are in good
condition.

If a tyre wears evenly, a wear indicator


will appear as a solid band across the
tread.
Replace the tyre when this happens.
Front
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY) Tread wear indicator
spare tyre in rotation.

Also, inspect them for uneven wear and


damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused
by one or a combination of the following:

• Incorrect tyre pressure


• Improper wheel alignment New tread Worn tread

• Out-of-balance wheel
You may need to replace it before the
• Severe braking
band is across the entire tread.

After rotation, inflate all tyre pressures to


specification (page 10-9) and inspect the
wheel nuts for tightness.

CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tyres and radial
tyres that have an asymmetrical tread
pattern or studs only from front to rear,
not from side to side. Tyre
performance will be weakened if
rotated from side to side.

8-34

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 35 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Temporary Spare Tyre ▼ Replacing a Wheel


Inspect the temporary spare tyre at least When replacing a wheel, make sure the
monthly to make sure it’s properly new one is the same as the original factory
inflated and stored. wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset.
The temporary spare tyre is easier to
handle because of its construction. It is Proper tyre balancing provides the best
lighter and smaller than a conventional riding comfort and helps reduce tread
tyre and should be used only for an wear. Out-of-balance tyres can cause
emergency and only for a short distance. vibration and uneven wear, such as
cupping and flat spots.
Use the temporary only until the
conventional tyre is repaired, which
should be as soon as possible. WARNING
Maintain its pressure at 420 kPa Using a Wrong-Sized Wheel:
(4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi). Using a wrong-sized wheel is
dangerous. Braking and handling
could be affected, leading to loss of
CAUTION control and an accident. Always use
wheels of the correct size on your
• Don’t use your temporary spare tyre
vehicle.
rim with a snow tyre or a
conventional tyre. Neither will
properly fit and could damage both
tyre and rim. CAUTION
• The temporary spare tyre has a tread A wrong-sized wheel may adversely
life of up to 5,000 km (3,000 miles), affect
depending on road conditions and • Tyre fit
driving habits.
• Wheel and bearing life
• The temporary spare tyre is for
limited use, however, if the tread • Ground clearance
wear solid-band indicator appears, • Snow-chain clearance
replace the tyre with the same type
of temporary spare (page 8-34). • Speedometer calibration
• Headlight aim
• Bumper height

8-35

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 36 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Light Bulbs

Overhead lights/Map lights

Front direction indicator lights

Front fog lights Side direction indicator lights

Headlights Parking lights

Brake lights/Tail lights Rear direction indicator lights

Rear fog light Number plate lights

Reverse lights High-mount brake lights

8-36

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 37 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Your Mazda’s headlights have replaceable ▼ Replacing a Headlight Bulb


halogen bulbs.
1. Make sure the headlight switch is off.
2. Lift the bonnet and find the bulb in the
WARNING rear of the headlight body.
3. Detach the electrical connector from
Handling Halogen Bulbs:
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is the bulb by pulling it to the rear.
dangerous. These bulbs contain
pressurised gas. If one is broken, it
will explode and serious injuries
could be caused by the flying glass.
If the glass portion is touched with
bare hands, body oil could cause the
bulb to overheat and explode when lit.
Never touch the glass portion of the
bulb with your bare hands and always
wear eye protection when handling or
working around halogen bulbs.

4. Pull off the sealing cover.


5. Unhook the bulb retaining spring.

Sealing cover
Do not touch the glass surface

Children and Halogen Bulbs:


Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be
caused by dropping a halogen bulb or
breaking it some other way. 6. Swing the retaining spring out and
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the away to free the headlight bulb.
reach of children.
7. Carefully remove the headlight bulb
from the socket by pulling it straight
back.

8-37

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 38 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

8. Replace the bulb.


9. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTE
• When reinstalling the sealing cover,
make sure faces up.
• Use the protective cover and carton
of the replacement bulb to dispose
of the old bulb promptly out of the
reach of children.

8-38

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 39 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Replacing a Bulb (Front)

Front direction indicator lights Parking lights

Front fog lights Side direction indicator lights

8-39

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 40 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Replacing a Bulb (Interior)

Overhead light (Front, Type B) Map lights (Type B)


Map lights (Type A)

Overhead light (Front, Type A) Luggage compartment light

ON
OF
F

Overhead light (Rear)

8-40

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 41 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Replacing a Bulb (Rear)

Brake lights/Tail lights High-mount brake lights


Rear direction indicator lights
Rear fog light (Driver's side)
Reverse lights

Number plate lights

An unsecured high-mount brake lights


will allow water to leak into the vehicle.
Make sure the high-mount brake light is
tightly fastened to the vehicle and if
water still leaks, consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer.

8-41

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 42 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

3. Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse


Fuses puller provided on the fuse panel.
Your vehicle’s electrical system is
protected by fuses. Fuse puller

If any lights, accessories, or controls don’t


work, inspect the appropriate circuit
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside
element will be melted.

If the same fuse blows again, avoid using


that system and consult an Authorised
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
▼ Fuse Replacement
4. Inspect it and replace if it’s blown.
If the electrical system doesn’t work, first
inspect fuses on the driver’s side.

1. Turn off the ignition switch and other


switches.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.

Normal Blown

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,


and make sure it fits tightly. If it
doesn’t, have an Authorised Mazda
Dealer install it.
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one
Fuse panel cover of the same rating from a circuit not
essential to vehicle operation, such as
the RADIO circuit.

CAUTION
Always replace a fuse with one of the
same rating. Otherwise you may
damage the electric system.

8-42

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 43 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

If the headlights or other electrical


components don’t work and the fuses in
the cabin are OK, inspect the fuse block
under the bonnet. If a fuse is blown, it
must be replaced. Follow these steps:

1. Turn off the ignition switch and all


other switches.
2. Remove the fuse block cover.

Fuse block
cover

Tab

3. If a fuse is blown, replace it with a new


one of the same rating.

Normal Blown

NOTE
To replace the MAIN fuse, contact an
Authorised Mazda Dealer (page 8-44).

8-43

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 44 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Fuse Panel Description


Fuse block (Engine compartment)

FUSE PROTECTED FUSE PROTECTED


DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
RATING COMPONENT RATING COMPONENT
1 HEATER 40 A Heater 12 — — —
Antilock brake 13 HORN 10 A Horn
2 ABS 60 A
system Hazard warning
For protection of 14 HAZARD 10 A flashers
3 IG KEY 1 40 A
various circuits Tail lights,
4 PTC 30 A PTC heater Parking light,
15 TAIL 15 A Number plate
5 GLOW 40 A Glow plug
For protection of light, Illumination
6 IG KEY 2 40 A various circuits For protection of
16 HEAD C/U 10 A
COOLING various circuits
7 FAN 30 A Cooling fan 17 FOG 15 A —
Interior lights, F.FOG &
8 BTN 40 A 18 DEISER 15 A Front fog light
Power door locks
Additional 19 STOP 15 A Brake lights
cooling fan for air 20 HEAD-R 15 A Headlight-right
9 AD FAN 30 A conditioner, For 21 HEAD-L 15 A Headlight-left
protection of
various circuits 22 — — —
Engine control 23 HEAD HI 7.5 A —
10 INJ OR FIP 30 A
system For protection of
24 MAIN 100 A
Air conditioner, all circuits
11 A/C 10 A For protection of
various circuits

8-44

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 45 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Fuse panel (Driver’s side)

FUSE PROTECTED FUSE PROTECTED


DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
RATING COMPONENT RATING COMPONENT
1 — — — Headlight cleaner,
2 — — — 15 H/CLN 20 A For protection of
various circuit
3 — — —
16 ST.SIG 7.5 A Engine control
Mirror defroster, For system
4 M/DEF 7.5 A protection of various
circuit 17 — — —
Seat warmer, For Power windows, For
5 S/W 15 A protection of various 18 P/W 30 A protection of various
circuit circuit
Air conditioner, For Power door locks,
6 A/C 15 A protection of various 19 D/L 30 A For protection of
circuit various circuit
7 — — — 20 ROOM 10 A Interior lights,
Liftgate light
8 — — —
Windscreen wiper
9 — — — 21 WIPER 20 A
and washer
10 METER 10 A Instrument cluster Power windows, For
11 ENG 10 A Engine control 22 P/W 30 A protection of various
system circuit
12 R.WIP 10 A Rear window wiper
and washer
Audio system, For
13 RADIO 15 A protection of various
circuit
14 OPT 15 A Accessory socket

8-45

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 46 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

Emission Control Maintenance (Australia)


Emission control maintenance is periodically required to ensure proper emission control
and engine performance. Refer to scheduled maintenance (page 8-3) for information on
when and how to perform the following inspections and servicing items.

For owners with a Mazda Workshop Manual, refer to the sections on Predelivery
Inspection and Scheduled Maintenance.
▼ Engine
Drive belts
Inspect the belts for cracks and other damage. Replace if necessary.
Adjust belt deflections to specified amounts at regular intervals. A replacement belt should
be inspected and adjusted after 1,000 km (600 miles) of use.
Engine oil
When changing the engine oil, use only API Service SG, SH, SJ or SL oil of the proper
viscosity for your climate.

Change it more frequently during heavy use under any of these conditions:

1. Dusty environment
2. Extended idling or low-speed operations
3. Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures or in an extremely humid climate
4. Repeated short-distance driving
Oil filter
Don’t fail to change the oil filter as prescribed. As with the engine oil, under severe driving
conditions, the filter should be changed more frequently.
Cooling system
When inspecting hoses (including the heater hose), connections, and clamps, look for
leaks, swellings, cracks, and other damage. Replace any defective hose or part.
Engine coolant
Change the coolant and flush the cooling system as prescribed.

8-46

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 47 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Fuel System and Air-Intake Control System


Idle speed
Adjusting the idle speed and related ignition timing requires special equipment; this work
should be done by a qualified technician.
Fuel filter
The cartridge filter in your Mazda cannot be cleaned. When you replace it, be certain that
installation is correct.
Fuel lines and hoses
When inspecting the fuel pipes, hoses, connections and clamps, look for leaks,
deterioration, and other damage.
Replace any defective hose or part.
Air filter
Besides replacing the filter regularly, always replace it if it’s torn or otherwise damaged.
Inspect and replace it more often than prescribed if the vehicle is used in very dusty or
sandy areas.
▼ Ignition System
Ignition timing
Adjusting the ignition timing requires special equipment; this work should be done by a
qualified technician.
Spark plugs
When inspecting the spark plugs, look for burned or eroded electrodes, fouling (carbon
deposits), and cracked porcelain. Clean the electrodes and, if necessary, adjust the gaps to
specification.

To maintain proper engine operation and emission control, spark plugs must always be in
good condition.
▼ Evaporative Emission Control System
When inspecting evaporative line hoses and connections (including the fuel tank and filler
cap), apply pressure to determine pressure-holding capacity. Replace any damaged or
deteriorated parts.

8-47

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 48 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Owner Maintenance

▼ Exhaust Emission Control System


E.G.R. system
The EGR valve must function properly and no leaks can be evident in the pipes and
connections. Replace any damaged part.
Clean the valve, pipes, and connections from time to time.

WARNING
Hot Surfaces:
EGR pipes are extremely hot during engine operation and for a while after operation.
Touching them could cause severe burns. Don’t touch these pipes while the engine is
running or until they have cooled off after the engine is stopped.

8-48

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 49 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Appearance Care

▼ Damage Caused by Bird


How to Minimize Dropping, Insects, or Tree Sap
Environmental Paint
Occurrence
Damage
Bird droppings contain acids. If these
The paintwork on your Mazda represents aren’t removed they can eat away the clear
the latest technical developments in and colour base coat of the vehicle’s
composition and methods of application. paintwork.

Environmental hazards, however, can When insects stick to the paint surface
harm the paint’s protective properties, if and decompose, corrosive compounds
proper care is not taken. form. These can erode the clear and
colour base coat of the vehicle’s
Here are some examples of possible paintwork if they are not removed.
damage, with tips on how to prevent them.
Tree sap will harden and adhere
▼ Etching Caused by Acid Rain or permanently to the paint finish. If you
Industrial Fallout scratch the sap off while it is hard, some
Occurrence vehicle paint could come off with it.

Industrial pollutants and vehicle Prevention


emissions drift into the air and mix with It is necessary to have your Mazda
rain or dew to form acids. These acids can washed and waxed to preserve its finish
settle on a vehicle’s finish. As the water according to the instructions in this
evaporates, the acid becomes concentrated section. This should be done as soon as
and can damage the finish. possible.
And the longer the acid remains on the
surface, the greater the chance is for Bird droppings can be removed with a soft
damage. sponge and water. If you are travelling
Prevention and these are not available, a moistened
tissue may also take care of the problem.
It is necessary to wash and wax your The cleaned area should be waxed
vehicle to preserve its finish according to according to the instructions in this
the instructions in this section. These section.
steps should be taken immediately after Insects and tree sap are best removed with
you suspect that acid rain has settled on a soft sponge and water or a commercially
your vehicle’s finish. available chemical cleaner.

Another method is to cover the affected


area with dampened newspaper for one to
two hours. After removing the newspaper,
rinse off the loosened debris with water.

8-49

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 50 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Appearance Care

▼ Water Marks
NOTE
Occurrence
• The paint chipping zone varies with
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can the speed of the vehicle. For
contain harmful minerals such as salt and example, when travelling at 90 km/
lime. If moisture containing these h (56 mph), the paint chipping zone
minerals settles on the vehicle and is 50 m (164 ft).
evaporates, the minerals will concentrate
and harden to form white rings. The rings • In low temperatures a vehicle’s
can damage your vehicle’s finish. finish hardens. This increases the
chance of paint chipping.
Prevention
• Chipped paint can lead to rust
It is necessary to wash and wax your forming on your Mazda. Before this
vehicle to preserve its finish according to happens, repair the damage by using
the instructions in this section. These Mazda touch-up paint according to
steps should be taken immediately after the instructions in this section.
you find water marks on your vehicle’s Failure to repair the affected area
finish. could lead to serious rusting and
▼ Paint Chipping expensive repairs.

Occurrence
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown
in the air by another vehicle’s tyres hits
your vehicle.
How to avoid paint chipping
Keeping a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of
having your paint chipped by flying
gravel.

8-50

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 51 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Appearance Care

To minimize scratches on the vehicle’s


Exterior Care paint finish:
Follow all label and container directions • Rinse off any dirt or other foreign
when using a chemical cleaner or polish. matter using lukewarm or cold water
Read all warnings and cautions. before washing.
▼ Maintaining the Finish • Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water
and a soft cloth when washing the
Washing vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.
To help protect the finish from rust and • Rub gently when washing or drying the
deterioration, wash your Mazda vehicle.
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a
• Take your vehicle only to a car wash
month, with lukewarm or cold water.
that keeps its brushes well maintained.
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the • Don’t use abrasive cleansers or wax
paint surface could be scratched. Here are that contain abrasives.
some examples of how scratching could
occur.
CAUTION
Scratches occur on the paint surface • Don’t use steel wool, abrasive
when: cleaners, or strong detergents
• The vehicle is washed without first containing highly alkaline or caustic
rinsing off dirt and other foreign agents on chrome-plated or
matter. anodised aluminium parts. This
may damage the protective coating;
• The vehicle is washed with a rough, also, cleaners and detergents may
dry, or dirty cloth. discolour or deteriorate the paint.
• The vehicle is washed at a car wash • To prevent damaging the aerial,
that uses brushes that are dirty or too retract it before entering a car wash
stiff. facility or passing beneath a low
• Cleansers or wax containing abrasives overhead clearance.
are used.
Pay special attention to removing salt,
NOTE dirt, mud, and other foreign material from
the underside of the wings, and make sure
• Mazda is not responsible for the drain holes in the lower edges of the
scratches caused by automatic car doors and rocker panels are clean.
washes or improper washing.
• Scratches are more noticeable on
vehicles with darker paint finishes.

8-51

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 52 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Appearance Care

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, 3. When waxing, coat evenly with the
industrial fallout, and similar deposits can sponge supplied or a soft cloth.
damage the finish if not removed
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.
immediately. When prompt washing with
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap
made for use on vehicles. NOTE
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with similar materials will usually also take
lukewarm or cold water. Don’t allow soap off the wax. Rewax these areas even if
to dry on the finish. the rest of the vehicle doesn’t need it.
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a
clean chamois to prevent water spots from ▼ Paint Damage Touch-up
forming. Repair damage to the finish caused by
stone chipping, damage during parking
etc., by using Mazda touch-up paint
WARNING before rust begins to form. First, remove
the dirt and grease with a clean soft cloth.
Driving with Wet Brakes:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous. If rust has already begun to form:
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious 1. Remove rust completely with
accident. Light braking will indicate sandpaper.
whether the brakes have been 2. Wipe with a clean soft cloth.
affected. Dry the brakes by driving
very slowly and applying the brakes 3. Apply rust preventive primer to the
lightly until brake performance is area.
normal. 4. After drying it completely, apply a
suitable top coat material to the area.
Waxing
Of course there will be no problem if you
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when assign the work to an Authorised Mazda
water no longer beads on the finish. Dealer.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body, ▼ Cavity Protection
wax the metal trim to maintain its lustre.
Cavities are treated for protection at the
factory, but additional protective
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives. treatment after the vehicle has been put
Waxes containing abrasive will remove into use will extend the life of the body.
paint and could damage bright metal We recommend that you consult an
parts. Authorised Mazda Dealer concerning this
additional precaution.
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for
metallic, mica, and solid colours.

8-52

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 53 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Appearance Care

▼ Bright-Metal Maintenance
• Use tar remover to remove road tar and WARNING
insects. Never do this with a knife or
similar tool. Driving with Wet Brakes:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
• To prevent corrosion on bright-metal Increased stopping distance or the
surfaces, apply wax or chrome vehicle pulling to one side when
preservative and rub it to a high lustre. braking could result in a serious
• During cold weather or in coastal accident. Light braking will indicate
areas, cover bright-metal parts with a whether the brakes have been
coating of wax or preservative heavier affected.
than usual. It would also help to coat Dry the brakes by driving very slowly
them with noncorrosive petroleum jelly and applying the brakes lightly until
or some other protective compound. brake performance is normal.

▼ Aluminium Wheel Maintenance


CAUTION
A protective coating is provided over the
Don’t use steel wool, abrasive aluminium wheels. Special care is needed
cleaners, or strong detergents to protect this coating.
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodised NOTE
aluminium parts. This may result in
damage to the protective coating and • Don’t use a wire brush or any
cause discolouration or paint abrasive cleaner, polishing
deterioration. compound, or solvent on aluminium
wheels. They may damage the
▼ Undercoating coating.
This special coating is applied to the • Only use a mild soap or neutral
critical parts of the underside to protect detergent and always use a sponge
vehicles from damage caused by or soft cloth to clean the wheels.
chemicals or stones. This coating is liable Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm or
to be damaged with time. Check this cold water. Also, be sure to clean
coating periodically. the wheels after driving on dusty or
salted roads. This helps prevent
Mazda Dealers are well informed on how corrosion.
repairs should be made. We recommend • Avoid washing your vehicle in an
that you consult with a Mazda Dealer. automatic car wash that uses high-
speed or hard brushes.
• If your aluminium wheels lose
lustre, wax the wheels.

8-53

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 54 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Appearance Care

▼ Cleaning the Upholstery and


Interior Care Interior Trim
▼ Instrument Panel Precautions Vinyl
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
and cosmetic oils from contacting the with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
instrument panel. They’ll damage and Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl
discolour it. If these solutions get on the cleaner.
instrument panel, wipe them off
Leather
immediately.
Real leather isn’t uniform and may have
scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean it
CAUTION with a leather cleaner or mild soap.
Do not use glazing agents.
Glazing agents contain ingredients Wipe it with a damp soft cloth; then dry
which may cause discoloration, and buff it with a dry soft cloth.
wrinkling, cracks and peeling. Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
▼ Cleaning the Interior and Floors
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Keeping the interior clean — especially Clean it with a mild soap solution good
the floor — is important to help prevent for upholstery and carpets. Remove fresh
rust. spots immediately with a fabric spot
cleaner.
Remove mud and salt from the cabin floor
as soon as possible. To keep the fabric looking clean and
fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its colour
If you transport salt, chemicals, or other will be affected, it can be stained easily,
toxic cargo in the cabin or luggage and its fire-resistance may be reduced.
compartment, be very careful not to spill
it. If you do, clean it up immediately.
CAUTION
From time to time, dry the cabin floor and Use only recommended cleaners and
the floor luggage compartment. procedures. Others may affect
Moisture may collect there and generate a appearance and fire-resistance.
rusting process.

8-54

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 55 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Maintenance and Care

Appearance Care

▼ Cleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt


Webbing
Clean the webbing with a mild soap
solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Follow instructions. Don’t bleach
or dye the webbing; this may weaken it.

After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry


the belt webbing and make sure there is
no remaining moisture before retracting
them.

WARNING
Damaged Seat Belt:
Using damaged seat belts is
dangerous. In a collision, damaged
belts cannot provide adequate
protection. Have your Authorised
Mazda Dealer replace damaged belts
immediately.

▼ Cleaning the Window Interiors


If the windows become covered with an
oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the
container.

CAUTION
Don’t scrape or scratch the inside of
the rear window. You may damage the
rear window defroster grid.

8-55

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 56 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

8-56

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

9 Customer Information

Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.

Warranty ...................................................................................... 9- 2
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country ..................... 9- 2
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories ......................... 9- 3

Cell Phones ................................................................................... 9- 4


Cell Phones Warning ............................................................... 9- 4

Declaration of Conformity ......................................................... 9- 5


Declaration of Conformity ...................................................... 9- 5

9-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Customer Information

Warranty

Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country


Government regulations in your country could require that automobiles meet specific
emission and safety standards.
Vehicles built for your country may differ from those built for other countries. In addition
to registration problems, satisfactory service may be difficult or even impossible in another
country.

The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.

Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.

There might not be an Authorised Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your
vehicle.

The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.

9-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Customer Information

Warranty

Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories


Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.
These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda
vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your
vehicle’s performance or safety system; the Mazda warranty doesn’t cover this. Before you
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer.

WARNING
Installation of Non-Genuine Parts or Accessories:
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories is dangerous. Improperly designed
parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system.
This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of injuries in an
accident. Always consult an Authorised Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine
parts or accessories.

Add-On Electrical and Electronic Equipment:


Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an
improper installer is dangerous. Essential systems could damaged, causing engine
stalling, air-bag (SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.
Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as
mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems.

Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the
installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.

9-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Customer Information

Cell Phones

Cell Phones Warning

WARNING
Use of Cell Phones and Other Devices by Driver:
Although not Mazda products, use of any electrical devices such as cell phones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also
ties-up the driver’s hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted
and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off
the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite
this warning, use a hands-free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the
vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical device while the vehicle is moving
and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
Please comply to the legal regulations concerning the use of communication
equipment in vehicles in your country.

9-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Customer Information

Declaration of Conformity

Declaration of Conformity

Immobilizer system

9-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Customer Information

Declaration of Conformity

Keyless entry system

9-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Customer Information

Declaration of Conformity

Air bag cut-off system

9-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

9-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

10 Specifications

Technical information about your Mazda.

Identification Numbers ............................................................. 10- 2


Vehicle Information Labels ................................................... 10- 2

Specifications ............................................................................. 10- 6


Specifications ........................................................................ 10- 6

10-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Information Labels


▼ Model Plate

▼ Chassis Number

10-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Identification Numbers

▼ Vehicle Emission Control Information Label

Label contents applicable only to Australia

10-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Identification Numbers

▼ Tyre Pressure Label ▼ Engine Number

Left-hand drive model Petrol engine

Front

Right-hand drive model Diesel engine

Front

10-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Identification Numbers

▼ Built Date (Australia)


The "Built Date" is the calendar month
and the year in which the body shell and
power train sub-assemblies are conjoined
and the vehicle is driven or moved from
the production line.

10-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Specifications

Specifications
▼ Engine
Model
Item Petrol engine Petrol engine
Diesel engine
(FP engine) (FS engine)
DOHC-16V in-line, DOHC-16V in-line, SOHC-16V in-line,
Type
4-cylinder 4-cylinder 4-cylinder
83.0×85.0 mm 83.0×92.0 mm 86.0×86.0 mm
Bore×Stroke
(3.27×3.35 in) (3.27×3.62 in) (3.39×3.39 in)
1,840 ml (1,840 cc, 1,991 ml (1,991 cc, 1,998 ml
Displacement
112.2 cu in) 121.5 cu in) (1,998 cc, 121.9 cu in)
Compression Type A 9.7 9.7 18.8
ratio Type B 9.1 9.7 18.8

▼ Electrical System
Item Model
Voltage 12 V
Australia Cold cranking amperes 306 A
Petrol engine Reserve capacity 78 min
Battery
Except Australia 12V-40AH/5HR, 12V-48AH/5HR, 12V-52AH/5HR*
Diesel engine 12V-64AH/5HR, 12V-70AH/5HR*
Alternator 12 V-80 A
Petrol engine 12 V-1.0 kW
Starter
Diesel engine 12 V-2.2 kW
*
Cold area
Petrol engine
Item Check engine light not equipped Check engine light equipped
vehicle vehicle
MAZDA BP13 18 110, BP14 18 110 —
Spark-plug NGK BKR5E-11, BKR6E-11 ZFR5F-11, ZFR6F-11
number DENSO K16PR-U11, K20PR-U11 KJ16CR11, KJ20CR11
CHAMPION RC8YC4, RC10YC4 —
Spark-plug gap 1.0-1.1 mm (0.040-0.043 in)

10-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Specifications

▼ Lubricant Quality
Lubricant Classification
Mazda genuine
API SJ/ACEA A1 or A3 5W-30
DEXELIA oil
Petrol engine
Mazda genuine
API SJ/ACEA A3 10W-40
DEXELIA oil
Europe
Mazda genuine
Engine oil* API CF/ACEA B1 or B3 5W-30
DEXELIA oil
Diesel engine
Mazda genuine
API CF/ACEA B3 10W-40
DEXELIA oil
Petrol engine API SG, SH, SJ or SL, or ILSAC GF-II or GF-III
Except Europe
Diesel engine API CD, CE or CF-4

* Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page 8-14.


Lubricant Classification
API Service GL-4 or GL-5
Any temperature
SAE 75W-90
Manual transaxle oil
API Service GL-4 or GL-5
Above 10°C (50°F)
SAE 80W-90
Automatic transaxle fluid ATF M-V
Power steering fluid ATF M-III or equivalent (e.g. Dexron® II)
European model SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Brake/Clutch fluid
Except European model SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3

▼ Capacities
(Approximate Quantities)
Unit
Item
L US qt Imp qt
With oil filter replacement 3.5 3.7 3.1
Petrol engine
Without oil filter replacement 3.3 3.5 2.9
Engine oil
With oil filter replacement 4.7 5.0 4.1
Diesel engine
Without oil filter replacement 4.5 4.8 4.0
With heater 7.5 7.9 6.6
Petrol engine
Without heater 6.9 7.3 6.1
Coolant
With heater 9.0 9.5 7.9
Diesel engine
Without heater 8.5 9.0 7.5
Manual transaxle 2.7 2.9 2.4
Transaxle oil
Automatic transaxle 7.2 7.6 6.3
Fuel tank 58 15.3 (US gal) 12.8 (Imp gal)
Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.

10-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Specifications

▼ Dimensions
Item mm (in)
Overall length 4,340 (170.8)
Overall width 1,705 (67.1)
With roof rail 1,600 (63.0)
Overall height
Without roof rail 1,570 (61.8)
14 inch wheel 1,475 (58.1)
Front tread 15 inch wheel 1,465 (57.7)
16 inch wheel 1,465 (57.7)
14 inch wheel 1,480 (58.3)
Rear tread 15 inch wheel 1,470 (57.9)
16 inch wheel 1,470 (57.9)
Wheelbase 2,670 (105.1)

▼ Light Bulbs
Light bulb Wattage
Headlights 60/55
Front direction indicator lights 21
Side direction indicator lights 5
Parking lights 5
Front fog lights 55
Rear direction indicator lights 21
Brake lights/Tail lights 21/5
High-mount brake light 5
Reverse lights 18
Rear fog lights 21
Number plate lights 5
Front 8
Overhead light
Rear 10
Map lights 5
Luggage compartment light 8

10-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 9 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Specifications

▼ Tyres

Sample tyre mark and its meaning

Nominal section width Mud and snow


Nominal aspect ratio in % Speed symbol
Construction code Load index (not on ZR tyres)
Nominal rim diameter in inches

Tyre mark information


Choose the proper tyres for your vehicle using the following tyre mark information.
Speed symbol Maximum permissible speed
Q Up to 160 km/h (100 mph)
R Up to 170 km/h (106 mph)
S Up to 180 km/h (112 mph)
T Up to 190 km/h (118 mph)
U Up to 200 km/h (125 mph)
H Up to 210 km/h (131 mph)
V Up to 240 km/h (150 mph)
W Up to 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y Up to 300 km/h (187 mph)
ZR Over 240 km/h (150 mph)

10-9

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 10 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Specifications

Tyre and inflation pressure


Check the tyre pressure label for tyre size and inflation pressure. Refer to Tyre Inflation
Pressure on page 8-33.
(Except Australian model)
Inflation pressure
Tyre size
Up to 3 persons —Full load
Front 210 kPa (2.1kgf/cm2or bar, 30 psi) 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm2or bar, 32 psi)
Rear 210 kPa (2.1kgf/cm2or bar, 30 psi) 280 kPa (2.8kgf/cm2or bar, 41 psi)
185/65R14 86T 2
Front 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm or bar, 32 psi) 240 kPa (2.4kgf/cm2or bar, 35 psi)
2
Rear 210 kPa (2.1kgf/cm or bar, 30 psi) 280 kPa (2.8kgf/cm2or bar, 41 psi)
2
Front 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm or bar, 32 psi) 240 kPa (2.4kgf/cm2or bar, 35 psi)
195/55R15 84V 2
Rear 210 kPa (2.1kgf/cm or bar, 30 psi) 280 kPa (2.8kgf/cm2or bar, 41 psi)
2
Front 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm or bar, 32 psi) 240 kPa (2.4kgf/cm2or bar, 35 psi)
2
Rear 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm or bar, 32 psi) 280 kPa (2.8kgf/cm2or bar, 41 psi)
Front 230 kPa (2.3kgf/cm2or bar, 33 psi) 250 kPa (2.5kgf/cm2or bar, 36 psi)
195/55R15 85V
Rear 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm2or bar, 32 psi) 280 kPa (2.8kgf/cm2or bar, 41 psi)
Front 240 kPa (2.4kgf/cm2or bar, 35 psi) 250 kPa (2.6kgf/cm2, 2.5 bar, 36 psi)
Rear 230 kPa (2.3kgf/cm2or bar, 33 psi) 290 kPa (3.0kgf/cm2, 2.9 bar, 42 psi)
Front 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm2or bar, 32 psi) 240 kPa (2.4kgf/cm2or bar, 35 psi)
195/60R15 88V
Rear 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm2or bar, 32 psi) 280 kPa (2.9kgf/cm2, 2.8 bar, 41 psi)
Front 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm2or bar, 32 psi) 240 kPa (2.4kgf/cm2or bar, 35 psi)
195/50R16 84V 2
Rear 220 kPa (2.2kgf/cm or bar, 32 psi) 280 kPa (2.8kgf/cm2or bar, 41 psi)

1 person’s weight: About 75kg


(Except Diesel engine, 7-Passenger model)
Before driving at high speeds, increase the tyre pressure. For speeds above 160 km/h (100
mph), increase the tyre pressure by 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi).
(Diesel engine, 7-Passenger model)
Before driving at high speeds, increase the tyre pressure. For speeds above 160 km/h (100
mph), increase the tyre pressure by 20 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm2, 2.9 psi).
(Australia model)
Model
Item
Front Rear
Tyre size 195/55R15 84V
Rim size 6JJ
Inflation pressure 220 kPa (32 psi) 210 kPa (30 psi)

Temporary spare tyre


Tyre size Inflation pressure
T115/70 D15 420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm2or bar, 60 psi)

10-10

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 11 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Specifications

Winter tyre
(Europe)
Inflation pressure
Tyre size
Up to 3 persons —Full load
Front 210 kPa (2.1 kgf/cm2or 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2or
185/65R14 86* bar, 30 psi) bar, 32 psi)
M+S
Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2or 280 kPa (2.8 kgf/cm2or
bar, 33 psi) bar, 41 psi)
FP engine
Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2or 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or
195/55R15 85* bar, 32 psi) bar, 35 psi)
M+S
Rear 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or 280 kPa (2.8 kgf/cm2or
bar, 35 psi) bar, 41 psi)
Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2or 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or
Petrol * bar, 32 psi) bar, 35 psi)
195/55R15 85
engine M+S 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or 280 kPa (2.8 kgf/cm2or
Rear
bar, 35 psi) bar, 41 psi)
Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2or 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or
FS engine 195/60R15 88* bar, 32 psi) bar, 35 psi)
M+S
Rear 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or 280 kPa (2.8 kgf/cm2or
bar, 35 psi) bar, 41 psi)
Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2or 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or
* bar, 32 psi) bar, 35 psi)
195/50R16 84
M+S
Rear 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or 280 kPa (2.8 kgf/cm2or
bar, 35 psi) bar, 41 psi)
Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2or 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or
185/65R14 86* bar, 32 psi) bar, 35 psi)
M+S
Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2or 280 kPa (2.9 kgf/cm2or
bar, 33 psi) bar, 41 psi)
Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2or 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm2or
Diesel bar, 33 psi) bar, 36 psi)
engine 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or 280 kPa (2.8 kgf/cm2or
Rear
195/55R15 85* bar, 35 psi) bar, 41 psi)
M+S
Front 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2or 250 kPa (2.6 kgf/cm2,
bar, 35 psi) 2.5 bar, 35 psi)
Rear 250 kPa (2.5 kgf/cm2or 290 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2,
bar, 36 psi) 2.9 bar, 42 psi)

*
Speed Symbol (The speed symbols for winter tyres are Q, T, and H only.)
1 person’s weight: About 75kg
Before driving at high speeds, increase the tyre pressure. For speeds above 160 km/h (100
mph), increase the tyre pressure by 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi).
▼ Fuses
Refer to the fuse rating on page 8-42.

10-11

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 12 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

10-12

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 1 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

11 Index

11-1

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 2 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Index

A B
Accessory Socket ............................. 6-61 Brake/Clutch
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Fluid ..........................................8-19
Accessories ........................................ 9-3 Brakes
Aerial ............................................... 6-16 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ....5-8
Air Bag Systems .............................. 2-66 Foot brake ...................................5-5
Air Filter .......................................... 8-24 Pad wear indicator ......................5-9
Air-Conditioning System ................... 6-2 Parking brake ..............................5-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........ 5-8 Warning light ..............................5-7
Warning light .............................. 5-8 Bulb Replacement ............................8-36
Ashtray ............................................. 6-56
Audio System ................................... 6-16 C
Audio control lever ................... 6-50
Audio set ................................... 6-23 Capacities .........................................10-7
Operating tips for audio Carbon Monoxide ..............................4-5
system ....................................... 6-16 Cargo Securing Loops ......................6-60
Automatic Transaxle Cargo Sub-Compartment .................6-60
Driving tips ............................... 5-15 Catalytic Converter ............................4-4
Fluid .......................................... 8-21 Cell Phones ........................................9-4
Hold mode ................................ 5-14 Child Restraint
Shift-lock override .................... 5-13 Categories of child-restraint
Shift-lock system ...................... 5-13 systems ......................................2-52
Transaxle ranges ....................... 5-12 Child restraint precautions ........2-49
Child-restraint system
B installation position ...................2-53
Child-restraint system
Battery suitability for various seat
Emergency Starting .................. 7-14 positions table ...........................2-58
Maintenance ............................. 8-30 Installing child-restraint
Specifications ........................... 10-6 systems ......................................2-59
Beeps ISOFIX bar-secured
Ignition key reminder ............... 5-37 child-restraint systems ..............2-62
Lights-on reminder ................... 5-37 Child Safety Locks for Rear Door .....3-9
Before Starting the Engine ................. 4-6 Cigarette Lighter ..............................6-55
After getting in ........................... 4-6 Clock ................................................6-54
Before getting in ......................... 4-6 Cup Holder .......................................6-57
Body Lubrication ............................. 8-23
Bonnet Release ................................ 3-16

11-2

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 3 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Index

D E
Defroster Engine
Rear window .............................5-43 Bonnet release ...........................3-16
Dimensions ......................................10-8 Coolant ......................................8-18
Door Locks ......................................... 3-6 Exhaust gas .................................4-5
Double Locking System ...................3-24 Oil ..............................................8-14
Driving In Flooded Area ..................4-11 Overheating ...............................7-12
Driving Tips Starting ........................................5-3
Automatic transaxle ..................5-15 Engine Compartment Overview .......8-13
Driving in flooded area .............4-11 Engine Coolant
Hazardous driving .......................4-8 Overheating ...............................7-12
Money-saving suggestions ..........4-7 Engine Coolant Temperature
Rocking the vehicle ....................4-8 Gauge ...............................................5-22
Running-in .................................. 4-7 Exhaust Gas ........................................4-5
Winter driving .............................4-9 Exterior Care ....................................8-51
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) ....5-18
TCS/DSC Indicator light ..........5-19 F
E Flasher
Hazard warning .........................5-45
Emergency Starting ..........................7-14 Headlights .................................5-38
Flooded engine ..........................7-14 Flat Tyre .............................................7-3
Jump-starting ............................7-14 Changing .....................................7-7
Push-starting .............................7-16 Spare tyre and tool storage ..........7-3
Running out of fuel ...................7-17 Fluids
Emergency Towing ..........................7-18 Classification .............................10-7
Emission Control Maintenance ........8-46 Owner maintenance ...................8-11
Air-intake control system .........8-47 Fog Lights
Engine .......................................8-46 Front ..........................................5-40
Evaporative emission Rear ...........................................5-40
control system ...........................8-47 Foot Brake ..........................................5-5
Exhaust emission Front Console ...................................6-59
control system ...........................8-48 Front seats ..........................................2-2
Fuel system ...............................8-47
Ignition system ..........................8-47
Emission Control System ...................4-4

11-3

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 4 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Index

F I
Fuel Indicator Lights ................................5-27
Filler flap and cap ..................... 3-15 Air bag cut-off system ..............5-34
Filter ......................................... 8-26 Front fog light ...........................5-35
Gauge ........................................ 5-23 Glow plug .................................5-36
Requirements .............................. 4-2 Headlight main-beam ................5-35
Tank capacity ............................ 10-7 HOLD .......................................5-35
Fuses ................................................ 8-42 Rear fog light ............................5-35
Panel description ...................... 8-44 Security .....................................5-33
Replacement ............................. 8-42 Shift position .............................5-36
TCS OFF ...................................5-36
G TCS/DSC ..................................5-36
Instrument Cluster ............................5-20
Gauges ............................................. 5-20 Instrument Panel Illumination ..........5-23
Glove Box ........................................ 6-59 Interior Care .....................................8-54
Interior Lights ..................................6-52
H
J
Hazard Warning Flasher .................. 5-45
Hazardous Driving ............................. 4-8 Jump-Starting ...................................7-14
Headlight Washer ............................ 5-43
Headlights K
Control ...................................... 5-38
Flashing .................................... 5-38 Keyless Entry System ........................3-3
Levelling ................................... 5-38 Keys ...................................................3-2
Main-low beam ......................... 5-38
On reminder .............................. 5-38 L
Running lights .......................... 5-39
Horn ................................................. 5-44 Label Information ............................10-2
Lane-Change Signals .......................5-39
I Liftgate ...............................................3-9
Luggage compartment ..............3-10
Ignition Light Bulbs
Keys ............................................ 3-2 Replacement ..............................8-36
Switch ......................................... 5-2 Specifications ............................10-8
Illuminated Entry System ................ 6-52 Lighter ..............................................6-55
Immobilizer System ......................... 3-20 Lighting Control ...............................5-38
In Case of Emergency ........................ 7-1 Lubricant Quality .............................10-7
Luggage Compartment Light ...........6-54

11-4

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 5 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Index

M R
Maintenance ....................................... 8-1 Rear Door Child Safety Locks ...........3-9
Approximate service time .........8-10 Rear Seat ............................................2-9
Introduction ................................. 8-2 Rear Window Defroster ...................5-43
Owner maintenance Rear Window Washer ......................5-42
precautions ................................8-12 Rear Window Wiper .........................5-42
Owner maintenance schedule ...8-11 Rearview Mirror ...............................3-29
Scheduled .................................... 8-3 Registering Your Vehicle
Manual Transaxle Operation ............5-10 in A Foreign Country .........................9-2
Map Lights .......................................6-53 Rocking the Vehicle ...........................4-8
Meters and Gauges ...........................5-20 Running-In .........................................4-7
Mirrors
Outside mirrors .........................3-26 S
Rearview mirror ........................3-29
Money-Saving Suggestions ...............4-7 Seat Belt System
2-point type ...............................2-47
O 3-point type ...............................2-40
Automatic locking .....................2-39
Odometer and Trip Meter ................5-21 Emergency locking ...................2-38
Outside Mirrors ................................3-26 Pregnant women ........................2-38
Overhead Lights ...............................6-53 Pretensioner and load limiting ..2-42
Overheating ......................................7-12 Rear-centre lap/shoulder ...........2-44
Seat belt precautions .................2-36
P Warning light ............................2-48
Seats
Paint Damage ...................................8-49 Flat folding ................................2-35
Parking Brake ..................................... 5-6 Front seat .....................................2-2
Parking in an Emergency ...................7-2 Rear seat ......................................2-9
Power Door Locks .............................3-8 Second-row seats .......................2-19
Power Steering .................................5-16 Third-Row Seat .........................2-28
Fluid ..........................................8-20 Second-row seats ..............................2-19
Power Windows ...............................3-12 Security System
Push-Starting ....................................7-16 Double locking system ..............3-24
Immobilizer system ...................3-20
Theft-deterrent system ..............3-22
Spare Tyre and Tool Storage ..............7-3
Specifications ...................................10-6
Speedometer .....................................5-21

11-5

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 6 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Index

S T
SRS Air Bags Trip Meter ........................................5-21
Air bag system description ....... 2-70 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........5-39
Supplementary restraint systems Tyres
precautions ................................ 2-66 Flat tyre .......................................7-3
Warning light ............................ 2-75 Inflation pressure ......................8-33
Starting the Engine ............................ 5-3 Replacement ..............................8-34
Steering Wheel ................................. 3-26 Rotation .....................................8-34
Horn .......................................... 5-44 Snow tyres ...................................4-9
Storage Compartments ..................... 6-59 Spare tyre and tool storage ..........7-3
Cargo securing loops ................ 6-60 Specifications ............................10-9
Cargo sub-compartment ........... 6-60 Tyre chains ................................4-10
Front console ............................ 6-59
Glove box ................................. 6-59 U
Under seat tray .......................... 6-59
Sunroof ............................................ 3-17 Under Seat Tray ...............................6-59
Sunshade .......................................... 3-19
Sunvisors .......................................... 6-52 V
T Vanity Mirrors ..................................6-52
Vehicle Information Labels .............10-2
Tachometer ...................................... 5-22
Temporary Spare Tyre ..................... 8-35 W
Theft-Deterrent System ................... 3-22
Third-row seat .................................. 2-28 Warning Lights ................................5-27
Tool .................................................... 7-3 ABS ...........................................5-31
Towing Air bag system ..........................5-32
Description ............................... 7-18 Brake system .............................5-29
Emergency towing .................... 7-18 Charging system .......................5-30
Hook ......................................... 7-19 Check engine .............................5-31
Towing caravan and trailers Door-ajar ...................................5-33
(Australia) ................................. 4-18 Engine oil pressure ....................5-30
Towing Caravan and Trailers Front seat belt pretensioner
(Europe) .................................... 4-13 system .......................................5-32
Traction Control System (TCS) ....... 5-16 Immobilizer system ...................5-33
TCS OFF indicator light ........... 5-17 Low fuel ....................................5-32
TCS OFF switch ....................... 5-18 Low washer fluid level .............5-33
TCS/DSC indicator light .......... 5-17 Seat belt .....................................5-32
Trip Computer ................................. 5-23 Sedimentor ................................5-33

11-6

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 7 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

Index

W
Warranty ............................................ 9-2
Washer Fluid ....................................8-23
Wheel Replacement .........................8-35
Windows
Power windows .........................3-12
Windscreen Washer .........................5-42
Windscreen Wipers ..........................5-41
Blades replacement ...................8-27
Winter Driving ...................................4-9

11-7

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H


J54L_8R34_EE_02H.BOOK Page 8 Monday, July 15, 2002 9:03 AM

11-8

Form No. 8R34-EE-02H

You might also like